Annotation of OpenXM/src/asir-doc/texinfo/texinfo.tex, Revision 1.1
1.1 ! ohara 1: % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
! 2: %
! 3: % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
! 4: \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
! 5: %
! 6: \def\texinfoversion{2020-06-25.17}
! 7: %
! 8: % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
! 9: %
! 10: % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
! 11: % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
! 12: % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
! 13: % License, or (at your option) any later version.
! 14: %
! 15: % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
! 16: % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
! 17: % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
! 18: % General Public License for more details.
! 19: %
! 20: % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
! 21: % along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
! 22: %
! 23: % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
! 24: % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
! 25: % restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
! 26: % of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
! 27: %
! 28: % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
! 29: % reports; you can get the latest version from:
! 30: % https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
! 31: % https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
! 32: % https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
! 33: % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
! 34: % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
! 35: %
! 36: % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include a
! 37: % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
! 38: % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
! 39: %
! 40: % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
! 41: % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
! 42: % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
! 43: % tex foo.texi
! 44: % texindex foo.??
! 45: % tex foo.texi
! 46: % tex foo.texi
! 47: % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
! 48: % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
! 49: % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
! 50: % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
! 51: %
! 52: % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
! 53: % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
! 54: % full Texinfo distribution.
! 55: %
! 56: % The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
! 57:
! 58:
! 59: \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
! 60:
! 61: % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
! 62: % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
! 63: % they might have appeared in the input file name.
! 64: \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
! 65: \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
! 66:
! 67: % LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for
! 68: % are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex.
! 69: \def\typeout{\immediate\write17}%
! 70:
! 71: \chardef\other=12
! 72:
! 73: % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
! 74: % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
! 75: \let\+ = \relax
! 76:
! 77: % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
! 78: \let\ptexb=\b
! 79: \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
! 80: \let\ptexc=\c
! 81: \let\ptexcomma=\,
! 82: \let\ptexdot=\.
! 83: \let\ptexdots=\dots
! 84: \let\ptexend=\end
! 85: \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
! 86: \let\ptexexclam=\!
! 87: \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
! 88: \let\ptexgtr=>
! 89: \let\ptexhat=^
! 90: \let\ptexi=\i
! 91: \let\ptexindent=\indent
! 92: \let\ptexinsert=\insert
! 93: \let\ptexlbrace=\{
! 94: \let\ptexless=<
! 95: \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
! 96: \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
! 97: \let\ptexplus=+
! 98: \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
! 99: \let\ptexrbrace=\}
! 100: \let\ptexslash=\/
! 101: \let\ptexsp=\sp
! 102: \let\ptexstar=\*
! 103: \let\ptexsup=\sup
! 104: \let\ptext=\t
! 105: \let\ptextop=\top
! 106: {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
! 107:
! 108: % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
! 109: % starts a new line in the output.
! 110: \newlinechar = `^^J
! 111:
! 112: % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
! 113: % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
! 114: %
! 115: \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
! 116: \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
! 117: \else
! 118: \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
! 119: \fi
! 120:
! 121: % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
! 122: \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
! 123: \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
! 124: \ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
! 125: \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
! 126: \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
! 127: \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
! 128: \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
! 129: \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
! 130: \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
! 131: \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
! 132: \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
! 133: \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
! 134: \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
! 135: \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
! 136: \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
! 137: \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
! 138: \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
! 139: \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
! 140: \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
! 141: \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
! 142: %
! 143: \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
! 144: \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
! 145: \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
! 146: \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
! 147: \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
! 148: \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
! 149: \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
! 150: \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
! 151: \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
! 152: \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
! 153: \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
! 154: \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
! 155: %
! 156: \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
! 157: \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
! 158: \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
! 159: \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
! 160: \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
! 161:
! 162: % Give the space character the catcode for a space.
! 163: \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax}
! 164:
! 165: % Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character.
! 166: \def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax}
! 167:
! 168: \chardef\dashChar = `\-
! 169: \chardef\slashChar = `\/
! 170: \chardef\underChar = `\_
! 171:
! 172: % Ignore a token.
! 173: %
! 174: \def\gobble#1{}
! 175:
! 176: % The following is used inside several \edef's.
! 177: \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
! 178:
! 179: % Hyphenation fixes.
! 180: \hyphenation{
! 181: Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
! 182: ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
! 183: data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
! 184: man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
! 185: par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
! 186: spell-ing spell-ings
! 187: stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
! 188: wide-spread wrap-around
! 189: }
! 190:
! 191: % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
! 192: % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
! 193: % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
! 194: % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
! 195: % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
! 196: %
! 197: \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
! 198: \def\loggingall{%
! 199: \tracingstats2
! 200: \tracingpages1
! 201: \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
! 202: \tracingparagraphs1
! 203: \tracingoutput1
! 204: \tracingmacros2
! 205: \tracingrestores1
! 206: \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
! 207: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
! 208: \tracingscantokens1
! 209: \tracingifs1
! 210: \tracinggroups1
! 211: \tracingnesting2
! 212: \tracingassigns1
! 213: \fi
! 214: \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
! 215: \errorcontextlines16
! 216: }%
! 217:
! 218: % @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
! 219: % aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
! 220: % after all.
! 221: %
! 222: \def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
! 223: \def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
! 224:
! 225: % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
! 226: % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
! 227: %
! 228: \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
! 229: \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
! 230: \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
! 231: \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
! 232: \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
! 233: \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
! 234:
! 235: % Output routine
! 236: %
! 237:
! 238: % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
! 239: % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
! 240: % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
! 241: %
! 242: \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
! 243:
! 244: \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
! 245: \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
! 246:
! 247: % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
! 248: % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
! 249: % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
! 250: %
! 251: % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
! 252: % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
! 253: %
! 254: % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
! 255: % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
! 256: % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.
! 257:
! 258: % \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one
! 259: % mark before the section break, and one after.
! 260: % In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \currentchapterdefs,
! 261: % and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \currentsectiondefs.
! 262: % Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous
! 263: % section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section
! 264: % from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top.
! 265: % @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark.
! 266: %
! 267: % See page 260 of The TeXbook.
! 268: \def\domark{%
! 269: \toks0=\expandafter{\currentchapterdefs}%
! 270: \toks2=\expandafter{\currentsectiondefs}%
! 271: \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
! 272: \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
! 273: \toks8=\expandafter{\currentcolordefs}%
! 274: \mark{%
! 275: \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top
! 276: \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom
! 277: \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks
! 278: }%
! 279: }
! 280:
! 281: % \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks,
! 282: % \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark.
! 283: %
! 284: % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
! 285: % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
! 286: % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
! 287: % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
! 288: % first @chapter.
! 289: \def\gettopheadingmarks{%
! 290: \ifcase0\the\savedtopmark\fi
! 291: \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
! 292: }
! 293: \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
! 294: \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\the\savedtopmark\fi}
! 295:
! 296: % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
! 297: \def\currentchapterdefs{}
! 298: \def\currentsectiondefs{}
! 299: \def\currentsection{}
! 300: \def\prevchapterdefs{}
! 301: \def\prevsectiondefs{}
! 302: \def\currentcolordefs{}
! 303:
! 304: % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
! 305: \newdimen\bindingoffset
! 306: \newdimen\normaloffset
! 307: \newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight
! 308:
! 309: % Main output routine.
! 310: %
! 311: \chardef\PAGE = 255
! 312: \newtoks\defaultoutput
! 313: \defaultoutput = {\savetopmark\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
! 314: \output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput}
! 315:
! 316: \newbox\headlinebox
! 317: \newbox\footlinebox
! 318:
! 319: % When outputting the double column layout for indices, an output routine
! 320: % is run several times, which hides the original value of \topmark. This
! 321: % can lead to a page heading being output and duplicating the chapter heading
! 322: % of the index. Hence, save the contents of \topmark at the beginning of
! 323: % the output routine. The saved contents are valid until we actually
! 324: % \shipout a page.
! 325: %
! 326: % (We used to run a short output routine to actually set \topmark and
! 327: % \firstmark to the right values, but if this was called with an empty page
! 328: % containing whatsits for writing index entries, the whatsits would be thrown
! 329: % away and the index auxiliary file would remain empty.)
! 330: %
! 331: \newtoks\savedtopmark
! 332: \newif\iftopmarksaved
! 333: \topmarksavedtrue
! 334: \def\savetopmark{%
! 335: \iftopmarksaved\else
! 336: \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark}%
! 337: \global\topmarksavedtrue
! 338: \fi
! 339: }
! 340:
! 341: % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.
! 342: % \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer
! 343: % and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page to be written
! 344: % to the auxiliary files.
! 345: %
! 346: \def\onepageout#1{%
! 347: \hoffset=\normaloffset
! 348: %
! 349: \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
! 350: \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
! 351: %
! 352: \checkchapterpage
! 353: %
! 354: % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page,
! 355: % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the
! 356: % values in \headline and \footline.
! 357: %
! 358: % Common context changes for both heading and footing.
! 359: % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
! 360: % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
! 361: \def\commonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars}
! 362: %
! 363: \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
! 364: \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makeheadline}%
! 365: \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
! 366: \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makefootline}%
! 367: %
! 368: {%
! 369: % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files.
! 370: % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
! 371: % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
! 372: % before the \shipout runs.
! 373: %
! 374: \atdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
! 375: \turnoffactive
! 376: \shipout\vbox{%
! 377: % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
! 378: \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
! 379: %
! 380: \unvbox\headlinebox
! 381: \pagebody{#1}%
! 382: \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
! 383: % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
! 384: % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
! 385: % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
! 386: \vskip 24pt
! 387: \unvbox\footlinebox
! 388: \fi
! 389: %
! 390: }%
! 391: }%
! 392: \global\topmarksavedfalse
! 393: \advancepageno
! 394: \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
! 395: }
! 396:
! 397: \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
! 398:
! 399: % Main part of page, including any footnotes
! 400: \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
! 401: {\catcode`\@ =11
! 402: \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
! 403: % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
! 404: \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
! 405: \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
! 406: \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
! 407: \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
! 408: \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
! 409: }
! 410:
! 411: % Check if we are on the first page of a chapter. Used for printing headings.
! 412: \newif\ifchapterpage
! 413: \def\checkchapterpage{%
! 414: % Get the chapter that was current at the end of the last page
! 415: \ifcase1\the\savedtopmark\fi
! 416: \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername
! 417: %
! 418: \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
! 419: \let\curchaptername\thischaptername
! 420: %
! 421: \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername
! 422: \chapterpagefalse
! 423: \else
! 424: \chapterpagetrue
! 425: \fi
! 426: }
! 427:
! 428: % Argument parsing
! 429:
! 430: % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
! 431: % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
! 432: % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
! 433: % For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}.
! 434: %
! 435: \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
! 436: \def\parseargusing#1#2{%
! 437: \def\argtorun{#2}%
! 438: \begingroup
! 439: \obeylines
! 440: \spaceisspace
! 441: #1%
! 442: \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
! 443: }
! 444:
! 445: {\obeylines %
! 446: \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
! 447: \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
! 448: \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
! 449: }%
! 450: }
! 451:
! 452: % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Pass the result on to
! 453: % \argcheckspaces.
! 454: \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
! 455: \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
! 456:
! 457: % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
! 458: %
! 459: % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
! 460: % @end itemize @c foo
! 461: % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
! 462: % by \finishparsearg.
! 463: %
! 464: \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
! 465: \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
! 466: \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
! 467: \def\temp{#3}%
! 468: \ifx\temp\empty
! 469: % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
! 470: \let\temp\finishparsearg
! 471: \else
! 472: \let\temp\argcheckspaces
! 473: \fi
! 474: % Put the space token in:
! 475: \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
! 476: }
! 477:
! 478: % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
! 479: % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
! 480: % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
! 481: % just before passing the control to \argtorun.
! 482: % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
! 483: % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
! 484: % that a pair of braces would be stripped.
! 485: %
! 486: % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
! 487: %
! 488: \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
! 489:
! 490:
! 491: % \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line
! 492: %
! 493: % \parseargdef\foo{...}
! 494: % is roughly equivalent to
! 495: % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
! 496: % \def\Xfoo#1{...}
! 497: \def\parseargdef#1{%
! 498: \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
! 499: }
! 500: \def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
! 501: \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
! 502: \def#1##1%
! 503: }
! 504:
! 505: % Several utility definitions with active space:
! 506: {
! 507: \obeyspaces
! 508: \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
! 509:
! 510: % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
! 511: % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
! 512: % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
! 513: % should produce a line of output anyway.
! 514: %
! 515: \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
! 516:
! 517: % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
! 518: % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
! 519: % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
! 520: \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
! 521: }
! 522:
! 523:
! 524: \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
! 525:
! 526: % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
! 527: %
! 528: % \envdef\foo{...}
! 529: % \def\Efoo{...}
! 530: %
! 531: % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
! 532: % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
! 533: % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
! 534: % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
! 535: % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
! 536: %
! 537: % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
! 538: % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
! 539: % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
! 540: % special case.)
! 541:
! 542:
! 543: % At run-time, environments start with this:
! 544: \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
! 545: % initialize
! 546: \let\thisenv\empty
! 547:
! 548: % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
! 549: \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
! 550: \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
! 551:
! 552: % Check whether we're in the right environment:
! 553: \def\checkenv#1{%
! 554: \def\temp{#1}%
! 555: \ifx\thisenv\temp
! 556: \else
! 557: \badenverr
! 558: \fi
! 559: }
! 560:
! 561: % Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
! 562: \def\badenverr{%
! 563: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 564: \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
! 565: not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
! 566: }
! 567: \def\inenvironment#1{%
! 568: \ifx#1\empty
! 569: outside of any environment%
! 570: \else
! 571: in environment \expandafter\string#1%
! 572: \fi
! 573: }
! 574:
! 575: % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
! 576: % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
! 577: %
! 578: \parseargdef\end{%
! 579: \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
! 580: \else
! 581: % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
! 582: \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
! 583: \csname E#1\endcsname
! 584: \endgroup
! 585: \fi
! 586: }
! 587:
! 588: \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
! 589:
! 590:
! 591: % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
! 592: % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
! 593: % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
! 594: % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
! 595: % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
! 596: {\catcode`@ = 11
! 597: % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
! 598: % if the definition is written into an index file.
! 599: \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
! 600: \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
! 601: }
! 602:
! 603: % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
! 604: \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
! 605:
! 606: % @* forces a line break.
! 607: \def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
! 608:
! 609: % @/ allows a line break.
! 610: \let\/=\allowbreak
! 611:
! 612: % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
! 613: \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
! 614:
! 615: % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
! 616: \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
! 617:
! 618: % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
! 619: \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
! 620:
! 621: % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
! 622: %
! 623: \def\onword{on}
! 624: \def\offword{off}
! 625: %
! 626: \parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
! 627: \def\temp{#1}%
! 628: \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
! 629: \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
! 630: \else
! 631: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 632: \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
! 633: \fi\fi
! 634: }
! 635:
! 636: % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
! 637: % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
! 638: % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
! 639: \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
! 640:
! 641: % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
! 642: % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
! 643: % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
! 644: % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
! 645: % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
! 646: % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
! 647: % the text is small, which looks bad.
! 648: %
! 649: % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
! 650: % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
! 651: % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
! 652: % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
! 653: % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
! 654: % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
! 655: %
! 656: \newbox\groupbox
! 657: \def\vfilllimit{0.7}
! 658: %
! 659: \envdef\group{%
! 660: \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
! 661: \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
! 662: \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
! 663: \fi
! 664: \startsavinginserts
! 665: %
! 666: \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
! 667: % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
! 668: % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
! 669: % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
! 670: % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
! 671: % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
! 672: % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
! 673: \comment
! 674: }
! 675: %
! 676: % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
! 677: % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
! 678: % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
! 679: % above. But it's pretty close.
! 680: \def\Egroup{%
! 681: % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
! 682: % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
! 683: \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
! 684: \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
! 685: \egroup % End the \vtop.
! 686: \addgroupbox
! 687: \prevdepth = \dimen1
! 688: \checkinserts
! 689: }
! 690:
! 691: \def\addgroupbox{
! 692: % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
! 693: \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
! 694: % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
! 695: \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
! 696: % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
! 697: % group, force a page break.
! 698: \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
! 699: \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight
! 700: \page
! 701: \fi
! 702: \fi
! 703: \box\groupbox
! 704: }
! 705:
! 706: %
! 707: % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
! 708: % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
! 709: %
! 710: \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
! 711: group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
! 712: where each line of input produces a line of output.}
! 713:
! 714: % @need space-in-mils
! 715: % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
! 716:
! 717: \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
! 718:
! 719: \parseargdef\need{%
! 720: % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
! 721: % paragraph.
! 722: \par
! 723: %
! 724: % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
! 725: \dimen0 = #1\mil
! 726: \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
! 727: \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
! 728: \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
! 729: %
! 730: % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
! 731: % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
! 732: % And a page break here is fine.
! 733: \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
! 734: %
! 735: % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
! 736: % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
! 737: % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
! 738: % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
! 739: % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
! 740: %
! 741: % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
! 742: % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
! 743: % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
! 744: % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
! 745: % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
! 746: % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
! 747: % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
! 748: \penalty9999
! 749: %
! 750: % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
! 751: \kern -#1\mil
! 752: %
! 753: % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
! 754: \nobreak
! 755: \fi
! 756: }
! 757:
! 758: % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
! 759:
! 760: \let\br = \par
! 761:
! 762: % @page forces the start of a new page.
! 763: %
! 764: \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
! 765:
! 766: % @exdent text....
! 767: % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
! 768:
! 769: % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
! 770: % That's how much \exdent should take out.
! 771: \newskip\exdentamount
! 772:
! 773: % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
! 774: \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
! 775:
! 776: % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
! 777: \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
! 778: \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
! 779:
! 780: % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
! 781: % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
! 782: % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
! 783: %
! 784: \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
! 785: \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
! 786: %
! 787: \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
! 788: \nobreak
! 789: \kern-\strutdepth
! 790: \vtop to \strutdepth{%
! 791: \baselineskip=\strutdepth
! 792: \vss
! 793: % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
! 794: % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
! 795: \ifx#1l%
! 796: \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
! 797: \else
! 798: \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
! 799: \fi
! 800: \null
! 801: }%
! 802: }}
! 803: \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
! 804: \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
! 805: %
! 806: % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
! 807: % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
! 808: % else use TEXT for both).
! 809: %
! 810: \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
! 811: \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
! 812: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 813: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 814: \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
! 815: \def\righttext{#2}%
! 816: \else
! 817: \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
! 818: \def\righttext{#1}%
! 819: \fi
! 820: %
! 821: \ifodd\pageno
! 822: \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
! 823: \else
! 824: \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
! 825: \fi
! 826: \temp
! 827: }
! 828:
! 829: % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
! 830: %
! 831: \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
! 832: \def\includezzz#1{%
! 833: \pushthisfilestack
! 834: \def\thisfile{#1}%
! 835: {%
! 836: \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
! 837: \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
! 838: \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
! 839: \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
! 840: \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
! 841: %
! 842: % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
! 843: % definitions, etc.
! 844: \expandafter
! 845: }\temp
! 846: \popthisfilestack
! 847: }
! 848: \def\filenamecatcodes{%
! 849: \catcode`\\=\other
! 850: \catcode`~=\other
! 851: \catcode`^=\other
! 852: \catcode`_=\other
! 853: \catcode`|=\other
! 854: \catcode`<=\other
! 855: \catcode`>=\other
! 856: \catcode`+=\other
! 857: \catcode`-=\other
! 858: \catcode`\`=\other
! 859: \catcode`\'=\other
! 860: }
! 861:
! 862: \def\pushthisfilestack{%
! 863: \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
! 864: }
! 865: \def\pushthisfilestackX{%
! 866: \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
! 867: }
! 868: \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
! 869: \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
! 870: }
! 871:
! 872: \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
! 873: \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
! 874: the stack of filenames is empty.}}
! 875: %
! 876: \def\thisfile{}
! 877:
! 878: % @center line
! 879: % outputs that line, centered.
! 880: %
! 881: \parseargdef\center{%
! 882: \ifhmode
! 883: \let\centersub\centerH
! 884: \else
! 885: \let\centersub\centerV
! 886: \fi
! 887: \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
! 888: \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
! 889: }
! 890: \def\centerH#1{{%
! 891: \hfil\break
! 892: \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
! 893: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
! 894: \line{#1}%
! 895: \break
! 896: }}
! 897: %
! 898: \newcount\centerpenalty
! 899: \def\centerV#1{%
! 900: % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
! 901: % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
! 902: % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
! 903: % prevent a page break here.
! 904: \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
! 905: \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
! 906: \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
! 907: \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
! 908: }
! 909:
! 910: % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
! 911: %
! 912: \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
! 913:
! 914: % @comment ...line which is ignored...
! 915: % @c is the same as @comment
! 916: % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
! 917:
! 918:
! 919: \def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active%
! 920: \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
! 921: \cxxx}
! 922: {\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
! 923: %
! 924: \let\comment\c
! 925:
! 926: % @paragraphindent NCHARS
! 927: % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
! 928: % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
! 929: % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
! 930: %
! 931: \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
! 932: \def\noneword{none}
! 933: %
! 934: \parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
! 935: \def\temp{#1}%
! 936: \ifx\temp\asisword
! 937: \else
! 938: \ifx\temp\noneword
! 939: \defaultparindent = 0pt
! 940: \else
! 941: \defaultparindent = #1em
! 942: \fi
! 943: \fi
! 944: \parindent = \defaultparindent
! 945: }
! 946:
! 947: % @exampleindent NCHARS
! 948: % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
! 949: % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
! 950: % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
! 951: \parseargdef\exampleindent{%
! 952: \def\temp{#1}%
! 953: \ifx\temp\asisword
! 954: \else
! 955: \ifx\temp\noneword
! 956: \lispnarrowing = 0pt
! 957: \else
! 958: \lispnarrowing = #1em
! 959: \fi
! 960: \fi
! 961: }
! 962:
! 963: % @firstparagraphindent WORD
! 964: % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
! 965: % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
! 966: % paragraphs.
! 967: %
! 968: % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
! 969: % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
! 970: % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
! 971: % By default, we suppress indentation.
! 972: %
! 973: \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
! 974: \def\insertword{insert}
! 975: %
! 976: \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
! 977: \def\temp{#1}%
! 978: \ifx\temp\noneword
! 979: \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
! 980: \else\ifx\temp\insertword
! 981: \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
! 982: \else
! 983: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 984: \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
! 985: \fi\fi
! 986: }
! 987:
! 988: % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
! 989: % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
! 990: %
! 991: % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
! 992: % paragraph.
! 993: %
! 994: \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
! 995: \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}%
! 996: \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}%
! 997: \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}%
! 998: }
! 999: %
! 1000: \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
! 1001: \global\let\indent = \ptexindent
! 1002: \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent
! 1003: \global\everypar = {}%
! 1004: }
! 1005:
! 1006:
! 1007: % @refill is a no-op.
! 1008: \let\refill=\relax
! 1009:
! 1010: % @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored
! 1011: \let\setfilename=\comment
! 1012:
! 1013: % @bye.
! 1014: \outer\def\bye{\chappager\pagelabels\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
! 1015:
! 1016:
! 1017: \message{pdf,}
! 1018: % adobe `portable' document format
! 1019: \newcount\tempnum
! 1020: \newcount\lnkcount
! 1021: \newtoks\filename
! 1022: \newcount\filenamelength
! 1023: \newcount\pgn
! 1024: \newtoks\toksA
! 1025: \newtoks\toksB
! 1026: \newtoks\toksC
! 1027: \newtoks\toksD
! 1028: \newbox\boxA
! 1029: \newbox\boxB
! 1030: \newcount\countA
! 1031: \newif\ifpdf
! 1032: \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
! 1033:
! 1034: %
! 1035: % For LuaTeX
! 1036: %
! 1037:
! 1038: \newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname
! 1039: \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc.
! 1040:
! 1041: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
! 1042: \else
! 1043: % Use Unicode destination names
! 1044: \txiuseunicodedestnametrue
! 1045: % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8
! 1046: \begingroup
! 1047: \catcode`\%=12
! 1048: \directlua{
! 1049: function UTF16oct(str)
! 1050: tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377')
! 1051: for c in string.utfvalues(str) do
! 1052: if c < 0x10000 then
! 1053: tex.sprint(
! 1054: string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
! 1055: string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
! 1056: math.floor(c / 256), math.floor(c % 256)))
! 1057: else
! 1058: c = c - 0x10000
! 1059: local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800
! 1060: local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00
! 1061: tex.sprint(
! 1062: string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
! 1063: string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
! 1064: string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
! 1065: string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
! 1066: math.floor(c_hi / 256), math.floor(c_hi % 256),
! 1067: math.floor(c_lo / 256), math.floor(c_lo % 256)))
! 1068: end
! 1069: end
! 1070: end
! 1071: }
! 1072: \endgroup
! 1073: \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}}
! 1074: % Escape PDF strings without converting
! 1075: \begingroup
! 1076: \directlua{
! 1077: function PDFescstr(str)
! 1078: for c in string.bytes(str) do
! 1079: if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then
! 1080: tex.sprint(-2,
! 1081: string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
! 1082: c))
! 1083: else
! 1084: tex.sprint(-2, string.char(c))
! 1085: end
! 1086: end
! 1087: end
! 1088: }
! 1089: % The -2 in the arguments here gives all the input to TeX catcode 12
! 1090: % (other) or 10 (space), preventing undefined control sequence errors. See
! 1091: % https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/bug-texinfo/2019-08/msg00031.html
! 1092: %
! 1093: \endgroup
! 1094: \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}}
! 1095: \ifnum\luatexversion>84
! 1096: % For LuaTeX >= 0.85
! 1097: \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest}
! 1098: \let\pdfoutput\outputmode
! 1099: \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal}
! 1100: \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog}
! 1101: \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax}
! 1102: \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource
! 1103: \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource
! 1104: \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex
! 1105: \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax}
! 1106: \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline}
! 1107: \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink}
! 1108: \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr}
! 1109: \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj}
! 1110: \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax}
! 1111: \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth
! 1112: \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight
! 1113: \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin}
! 1114: \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin}
! 1115: \fi
! 1116: \fi
! 1117:
! 1118: % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
! 1119: % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
! 1120: \ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
! 1121: \else
! 1122: \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
! 1123: \else
! 1124: \ifcase\pdfoutput
! 1125: \else
! 1126: \pdftrue
! 1127: \fi
! 1128: \fi
! 1129: \fi
! 1130:
! 1131: \newif\ifpdforxetex
! 1132: \pdforxetexfalse
! 1133: \ifpdf
! 1134: \pdforxetextrue
! 1135: \fi
! 1136: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined\else
! 1137: \pdforxetextrue
! 1138: \fi
! 1139:
! 1140:
! 1141: % Output page labels information.
! 1142: % See PDF reference v.1.7 p.594, section 8.3.1.
! 1143: \ifpdf
! 1144: \def\pagelabels{%
! 1145: \def\title{0 << /P (T-) /S /D >>}%
! 1146: \edef\roman{\the\romancount << /S /r >>}%
! 1147: \edef\arabic{\the\arabiccount << /S /D >>}%
! 1148: %
! 1149: % Page label ranges must be increasing. Remove any duplicates.
! 1150: % (There is a slight chance of this being wrong if e.g. there is
! 1151: % a @contents but no @titlepage, etc.)
! 1152: %
! 1153: \ifnum\romancount=0 \def\roman{}\fi
! 1154: \ifnum\arabiccount=0 \def\title{}%
! 1155: \else
! 1156: \ifnum\romancount=\arabiccount \def\roman{}\fi
! 1157: \fi
! 1158: %
! 1159: \ifnum\romancount<\arabiccount
! 1160: \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \roman \arabic ] >> }\relax
! 1161: \else
! 1162: \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \arabic \roman ] >> }\relax
! 1163: \fi
! 1164: }
! 1165: \else
! 1166: \let\pagelabels\relax
! 1167: \fi
! 1168:
! 1169: \newcount\pagecount \pagecount=0
! 1170: \newcount\romancount \romancount=0
! 1171: \newcount\arabiccount \arabiccount=0
! 1172: \ifpdf
! 1173: \let\ptxadvancepageno\advancepageno
! 1174: \def\advancepageno{%
! 1175: \ptxadvancepageno\global\advance\pagecount by 1
! 1176: }
! 1177: \fi
! 1178:
! 1179:
! 1180: % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
! 1181: % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
! 1182: % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
! 1183: % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
! 1184: %
! 1185: % See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
! 1186: % related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
! 1187: % to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
! 1188: % that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
! 1189: % do this reliably, so we use it.
! 1190:
! 1191: % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
! 1192: % which we \xdef.
! 1193: \def\txiescapepdf#1{%
! 1194: \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
! 1195: % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
! 1196: % Many times it won't matter.
! 1197: \xdef#1{#1}%
! 1198: \else
! 1199: % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
! 1200: % backslashes, and other special chars.
! 1201: \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
! 1202: \fi
! 1203: }
! 1204: \def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{%
! 1205: \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined
! 1206: % No UTF-16 converting macro available.
! 1207: \txiescapepdf{#1}%
! 1208: \else
! 1209: \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}%
! 1210: \fi
! 1211: }
! 1212:
! 1213: \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
! 1214: with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
! 1215: be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
! 1216: output) for that.)}
! 1217:
! 1218: \ifpdf
! 1219: %
! 1220: % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex,
! 1221: % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
! 1222: % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
! 1223: % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as
! 1224: % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use
! 1225: % black by default, though.
! 1226: \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
! 1227: \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
! 1228: %
! 1229: % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
! 1230: % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
! 1231: \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
! 1232: %
! 1233: % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
! 1234: % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
! 1235: \def\setcolor#1{%
! 1236: \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
! 1237: \domark
! 1238: \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
! 1239: }
! 1240: %
! 1241: \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
! 1242: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
! 1243: \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
! 1244: \def\currentcolordefs{}
! 1245: %
! 1246: \def\makefootline{%
! 1247: \baselineskip24pt
! 1248: \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
! 1249: }
! 1250: %
! 1251: \def\makeheadline{%
! 1252: \vbox to 0pt{%
! 1253: \vskip-22.5pt
! 1254: \line{%
! 1255: \vbox to8.5pt{}%
! 1256: % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
! 1257: \getcolormarks
! 1258: % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
! 1259: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
! 1260: }%
! 1261: \vss
! 1262: }%
! 1263: \nointerlineskip
! 1264: }
! 1265: %
! 1266: %
! 1267: \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
! 1268: %
! 1269: % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
! 1270: \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
! 1271: \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 1272: \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 1273: %
! 1274: % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
! 1275: % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
! 1276: % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
! 1277: % bitmap.
! 1278: \let\pdfimgext=\empty
! 1279: \begingroup
! 1280: \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
! 1281: \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
! 1282: \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
! 1283: \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
! 1284: \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
! 1285: \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
! 1286: \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
! 1287: \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
! 1288: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
! 1289: \fi
! 1290: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
! 1291: \fi
! 1292: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
! 1293: \fi
! 1294: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
! 1295: \fi
! 1296: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
! 1297: \fi
! 1298: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
! 1299: \fi
! 1300: \closein 1
! 1301: \endgroup
! 1302: %
! 1303: % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
! 1304: % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
! 1305: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
! 1306: \immediate\pdfimage
! 1307: \else
! 1308: \immediate\pdfximage
! 1309: \fi
! 1310: \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
! 1311: \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
! 1312: \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
! 1313: #1.\pdfimgext
! 1314: \else
! 1315: {#1.\pdfimgext}%
! 1316: \fi
! 1317: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
! 1318: \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
! 1319: \fi}
! 1320: %
! 1321: \def\setpdfdestname#1{{%
! 1322: % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
! 1323: % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
! 1324: \indexnofonts
! 1325: \makevalueexpandable
! 1326: \turnoffactive
! 1327: \iftxiuseunicodedestname
! 1328: \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
! 1329: % Pass through Latin-1 characters.
! 1330: % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode.
! 1331: \else
! 1332: \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
! 1333: % Pass through Unicode characters.
! 1334: \else
! 1335: % Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
! 1336: \passthroughcharsfalse
! 1337: \fi
! 1338: \fi
! 1339: \else
! 1340: % Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
! 1341: \passthroughcharsfalse
! 1342: \fi
! 1343: \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
! 1344: \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
! 1345: }}
! 1346: %
! 1347: \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{%
! 1348: \indexnofonts
! 1349: \makevalueexpandable
! 1350: \turnoffactive
! 1351: \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
! 1352: % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark
! 1353: % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for
! 1354: % the "PDFDocEncoding".
! 1355: \passthroughcharstrue
! 1356: % Pass through Latin-1 characters.
! 1357: % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode
! 1358: % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding
! 1359: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
! 1360: \else
! 1361: \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
! 1362: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
! 1363: % For pdfTeX with UTF-8.
! 1364: % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings,
! 1365: % but the code for this isn't done yet.
! 1366: % Use ASCII approximations.
! 1367: \passthroughcharsfalse
! 1368: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
! 1369: \else
! 1370: % For LuaTeX with UTF-8.
! 1371: % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts.
! 1372: \passthroughcharstrue
! 1373: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
! 1374: \fi
! 1375: \else
! 1376: % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings.
! 1377: % Use ASCII approximations.
! 1378: \passthroughcharsfalse
! 1379: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
! 1380: \fi
! 1381: \fi
! 1382: % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16
! 1383: % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding
! 1384: \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext
! 1385: }}
! 1386: %
! 1387: \def\pdfmkdest#1{%
! 1388: \setpdfdestname{#1}%
! 1389: \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
! 1390: }
! 1391: %
! 1392: % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
! 1393: \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
! 1394: %
! 1395: % by default, use black for everything.
! 1396: \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
! 1397: \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
! 1398: \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
! 1399: %
! 1400: % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
! 1401: % come from Petr Olsak
! 1402: \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
! 1403: \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
! 1404: \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
! 1405: \advance\tempnum by 1
! 1406: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
! 1407: %
! 1408: % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
! 1409: % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
! 1410: % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
! 1411: % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
! 1412: % #4 is the page number
! 1413: %
! 1414: \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
! 1415: % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
! 1416: % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
! 1417: % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
! 1418: % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
! 1419: \setpdfoutlinetext{#1}
! 1420: \setpdfdestname{#3}
! 1421: \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
! 1422: \def\pdfdestname{#4}%
! 1423: \fi
! 1424: %
! 1425: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
! 1426: }
! 1427: %
! 1428: \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
! 1429: \begingroup
! 1430: % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
! 1431: \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
! 1432: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1433: \def\thischapnum{##2}%
! 1434: \def\thissecnum{0}%
! 1435: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
! 1436: }%
! 1437: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1438: \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
! 1439: \def\thissecnum{##2}%
! 1440: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
! 1441: }%
! 1442: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1443: \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
! 1444: \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
! 1445: }%
! 1446: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1447: \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
! 1448: }%
! 1449: \def\thischapnum{0}%
! 1450: \def\thissecnum{0}%
! 1451: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
! 1452: %
! 1453: % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
! 1454: % al. a second time, below.
! 1455: \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
! 1456: \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
! 1457: \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
! 1458: \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
! 1459: \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
! 1460: \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
! 1461: \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
! 1462: \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
! 1463: \readdatafile{toc}%
! 1464: %
! 1465: % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
! 1466: % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
! 1467: % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
! 1468: %
! 1469: % We use the node names as the destinations.
! 1470: %
! 1471: % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number
! 1472: % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much
! 1473: % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer.
! 1474: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1475: \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1476: \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1477: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1478: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1479: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1480: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1481: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1482: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
! 1483: \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1484: %
! 1485: % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
! 1486: % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
! 1487: % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
! 1488: % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
! 1489: % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
! 1490: %
! 1491: % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
! 1492: % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too
! 1493: % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents
! 1494: % we use for the index sort strings.
! 1495: %
! 1496: \indexnofonts
! 1497: \setupdatafile
! 1498: % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
! 1499: % Texinfo index files. So set that up.
! 1500: \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
! 1501: \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
! 1502: \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
! 1503: \input \tocreadfilename
! 1504: \endgroup
! 1505: }
! 1506: {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
! 1507: \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
! 1508: \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
! 1509: \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
! 1510: ]
! 1511: %
! 1512: \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
! 1513: \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
! 1514: \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
! 1515: \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
! 1516: \advance\filenamelength by 1
! 1517: \fi
! 1518: \nextsp}
! 1519: \def\getfilename#1{%
! 1520: \filenamelength=0
! 1521: % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
! 1522: % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
! 1523: \edef\temp{#1}%
! 1524: \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
! 1525: }
! 1526: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
! 1527: \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
! 1528: \else
! 1529: \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
! 1530: \fi
! 1531: % make a live url in pdf output.
! 1532: \def\pdfurl#1{%
! 1533: \begingroup
! 1534: % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
! 1535: % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
! 1536: % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
! 1537: % people have actually reported a problem with.
! 1538: %
! 1539: \normalturnoffactive
! 1540: \def\@{@}%
! 1541: \let\/=\empty
! 1542: \makevalueexpandable
! 1543: % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
! 1544: % special-casing \var here?
! 1545: \def\var##1{##1}%
! 1546: %
! 1547: \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
! 1548: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
! 1549: user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
! 1550: \endgroup}
! 1551: % \pdfgettoks - Surround page numbers in #1 with @pdflink. #1 may
! 1552: % be a simple number, or a list of numbers in the case of an index
! 1553: % entry.
! 1554: \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
! 1555: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
! 1556: \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
! 1557: \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
! 1558: \def\maketoks{%
! 1559: \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
! 1560: \ifx\first0\adn0
! 1561: \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
! 1562: \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
! 1563: \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
! 1564: \else
! 1565: \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
! 1566: \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
! 1567: \let\next=\maketoks
! 1568: \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
! 1569: \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
! 1570: \fi
! 1571: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 1572: \next}
! 1573: \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
! 1574: {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
! 1575: \def\pdflink#1{%
! 1576: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
! 1577: \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
! 1578: \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
! 1579: \else
! 1580: % non-pdf mode
! 1581: \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
! 1582: \let\pdfurl = \gobble
! 1583: \let\endlink = \relax
! 1584: \let\setcolor = \gobble
! 1585: \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
! 1586: \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
! 1587: \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
! 1588:
! 1589: %
! 1590: % For XeTeX
! 1591: %
! 1592: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 1593: \else
! 1594: %
! 1595: % XeTeX version check
! 1596: %
! 1597: \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1
! 1598: % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307.
! 1599: % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941).
! 1600: % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special
! 1601: % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'.
! 1602: \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010}
! 1603: % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+.
! 1604: % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF.
! 1605: \txiuseunicodedestnametrue
! 1606: \else
! 1607: % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the
! 1608: % `dvipdfmx:config' special.
! 1609: % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement,
! 1610: % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary.
! 1611: %
! 1612: % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF
! 1613: % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue.
! 1614: % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753).
! 1615: \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse
! 1616: \fi
! 1617: %
! 1618: % Color support
! 1619: %
! 1620: \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
! 1621: \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
! 1622: %
! 1623: \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}}
! 1624: %
! 1625: % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
! 1626: % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
! 1627: \def\setcolor#1{%
! 1628: \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
! 1629: \domark
! 1630: \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
! 1631: }
! 1632: %
! 1633: \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
! 1634: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
! 1635: \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
! 1636: \def\currentcolordefs{}
! 1637: %
! 1638: \def\makefootline{%
! 1639: \baselineskip24pt
! 1640: \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
! 1641: }
! 1642: %
! 1643: \def\makeheadline{%
! 1644: \vbox to 0pt{%
! 1645: \vskip-22.5pt
! 1646: \line{%
! 1647: \vbox to8.5pt{}%
! 1648: % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
! 1649: \getcolormarks
! 1650: % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
! 1651: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
! 1652: }%
! 1653: \vss
! 1654: }%
! 1655: \nointerlineskip
! 1656: }
! 1657: %
! 1658: % PDF outline support
! 1659: %
! 1660: % Emulate pdfTeX primitive
! 1661: \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{%
! 1662: \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}%
! 1663: }
! 1664: %
! 1665: \def\setpdfdestname#1{{%
! 1666: % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
! 1667: % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
! 1668: \indexnofonts
! 1669: \makevalueexpandable
! 1670: \turnoffactive
! 1671: \iftxiuseunicodedestname
! 1672: % Pass through Unicode characters.
! 1673: \else
! 1674: % Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
! 1675: \passthroughcharsfalse
! 1676: \fi
! 1677: \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
! 1678: \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
! 1679: }}
! 1680: %
! 1681: \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{%
! 1682: \turnoffactive
! 1683: % Always use Unicode characters in title texts.
! 1684: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
! 1685: % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16.
! 1686: % So we do not convert.
! 1687: \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
! 1688: }}
! 1689: %
! 1690: \def\pdfmkdest#1{%
! 1691: \setpdfdestname{#1}%
! 1692: \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
! 1693: }
! 1694: %
! 1695: % by default, use black for everything.
! 1696: \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
! 1697: \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
! 1698: \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
! 1699: %
! 1700: \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
! 1701: \setpdfoutlinetext{#1}
! 1702: \setpdfdestname{#3}
! 1703: \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
! 1704: \def\pdfdestname{#4}%
! 1705: \fi
! 1706: %
! 1707: \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A
! 1708: << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }%
! 1709: }
! 1710: %
! 1711: \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
! 1712: \begingroup
! 1713: %
! 1714: % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary.
! 1715: % Therefore, we read toc only once.
! 1716: %
! 1717: % We use node names as destinations.
! 1718: %
! 1719: % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number
! 1720: % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much
! 1721: % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer.
! 1722: \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
! 1723: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1724: \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1725: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1726: \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1727: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1728: \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1729: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1730: \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1731: %
! 1732: \let\appentry\numchapentry%
! 1733: \let\appsecentry\numsecentry%
! 1734: \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
! 1735: \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
! 1736: \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
! 1737: \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}%
! 1738: \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry%
! 1739: \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
! 1740: \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
! 1741: %
! 1742: % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16.
! 1743: % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered.
! 1744: %
! 1745: \indexnofonts
! 1746: \setupdatafile
! 1747: % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
! 1748: % Texinfo index files. So set that up.
! 1749: \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
! 1750: \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
! 1751: \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
! 1752: \input \tocreadfilename
! 1753: \endgroup
! 1754: }
! 1755: {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
! 1756: \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
! 1757: \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
! 1758: \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
! 1759: ]
! 1760:
! 1761: \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> }
! 1762: % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary
! 1763: % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it.
! 1764: % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315,
! 1765: % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings.
! 1766: % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753).
! 1767: %
! 1768: \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
! 1769: \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
! 1770: \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
! 1771: \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
! 1772: \advance\filenamelength by 1
! 1773: \fi
! 1774: \nextsp}
! 1775: \def\getfilename#1{%
! 1776: \filenamelength=0
! 1777: % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
! 1778: % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
! 1779: \edef\temp{#1}%
! 1780: \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
! 1781: }
! 1782: % make a live url in pdf output.
! 1783: \def\pdfurl#1{%
! 1784: \begingroup
! 1785: % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
! 1786: % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
! 1787: % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
! 1788: % people have actually reported a problem with.
! 1789: %
! 1790: \normalturnoffactive
! 1791: \def\@{@}%
! 1792: \let\/=\empty
! 1793: \makevalueexpandable
! 1794: % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
! 1795: % special-casing \var here?
! 1796: \def\var##1{##1}%
! 1797: %
! 1798: \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
! 1799: \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0]
! 1800: /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}%
! 1801: \endgroup}
! 1802: \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}}
! 1803: \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
! 1804: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
! 1805: \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
! 1806: \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
! 1807: \def\maketoks{%
! 1808: \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
! 1809: \ifx\first0\adn0
! 1810: \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
! 1811: \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
! 1812: \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
! 1813: \else
! 1814: \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
! 1815: \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
! 1816: \let\next=\maketoks
! 1817: \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
! 1818: \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
! 1819: \fi
! 1820: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 1821: \next}
! 1822: \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
! 1823: {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
! 1824: \def\pdflink#1{%
! 1825: \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0]
! 1826: /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}%
! 1827: \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
! 1828: \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
! 1829: %
! 1830: %
! 1831: % @image support
! 1832: %
! 1833: % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
! 1834: \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{%
! 1835: \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 1836: \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 1837: %
! 1838: % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
! 1839: % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
! 1840: % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
! 1841: % bitmap.
! 1842: \let\xeteximgext=\empty
! 1843: \begingroup
! 1844: \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
! 1845: \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
! 1846: \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
! 1847: \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
! 1848: \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
! 1849: \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
! 1850: \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}%
! 1851: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}%
! 1852: \fi
! 1853: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}%
! 1854: \fi
! 1855: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}%
! 1856: \fi
! 1857: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}%
! 1858: \fi
! 1859: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}%
! 1860: \fi
! 1861: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}%
! 1862: \fi
! 1863: \closein 1
! 1864: \endgroup
! 1865: %
! 1866: \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}%
! 1867: \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext
! 1868: \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
! 1869: \else
! 1870: \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}%
! 1871: \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext
! 1872: \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
! 1873: \else
! 1874: \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
! 1875: \fi
! 1876: \fi
! 1877: \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi
! 1878: \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax
! 1879: }
! 1880: \fi
! 1881:
! 1882:
! 1883: %
! 1884: \message{fonts,}
! 1885:
! 1886: % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
! 1887: % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
! 1888: % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
! 1889: %
! 1890: \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
! 1891: \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
! 1892: \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
! 1893: %
! 1894: % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
! 1895: \def\baselinefactor{1}
! 1896: %
! 1897: \newdimen\textleading
! 1898: \def\setleading#1{%
! 1899: \dimen0 = #1\relax
! 1900: \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
! 1901: \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
! 1902: \normalbaselines
! 1903: \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
! 1904: \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
! 1905: depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
! 1906: }%
! 1907: }
! 1908:
! 1909: % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
! 1910: %
! 1911: % do nothing with this by default.
! 1912: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
! 1913: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
! 1914: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
! 1915:
! 1916: % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
! 1917: % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
! 1918: % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
! 1919: \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
! 1920: \begingroup
! 1921: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
! 1922: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
! 1923: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 1924: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 1925: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
! 1926: %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
! 1927: %%Version: 1.000
! 1928: %%EndComments
! 1929: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
! 1930: 12 dict begin
! 1931: begincmap
! 1932: /CIDSystemInfo
! 1933: << /Registry (TeX)
! 1934: /Ordering (OT1)
! 1935: /Supplement 0
! 1936: >> def
! 1937: /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
! 1938: /CMapType 2 def
! 1939: 1 begincodespacerange
! 1940: <00> <7F>
! 1941: endcodespacerange
! 1942: 8 beginbfrange
! 1943: <00> <01> <0393>
! 1944: <09> <0A> <03A8>
! 1945: <23> <26> <0023>
! 1946: <28> <3B> <0028>
! 1947: <3F> <5B> <003F>
! 1948: <5D> <5E> <005D>
! 1949: <61> <7A> <0061>
! 1950: <7B> <7C> <2013>
! 1951: endbfrange
! 1952: 40 beginbfchar
! 1953: <02> <0398>
! 1954: <03> <039B>
! 1955: <04> <039E>
! 1956: <05> <03A0>
! 1957: <06> <03A3>
! 1958: <07> <03D2>
! 1959: <08> <03A6>
! 1960: <0B> <00660066>
! 1961: <0C> <00660069>
! 1962: <0D> <0066006C>
! 1963: <0E> <006600660069>
! 1964: <0F> <00660066006C>
! 1965: <10> <0131>
! 1966: <11> <0237>
! 1967: <12> <0060>
! 1968: <13> <00B4>
! 1969: <14> <02C7>
! 1970: <15> <02D8>
! 1971: <16> <00AF>
! 1972: <17> <02DA>
! 1973: <18> <00B8>
! 1974: <19> <00DF>
! 1975: <1A> <00E6>
! 1976: <1B> <0153>
! 1977: <1C> <00F8>
! 1978: <1D> <00C6>
! 1979: <1E> <0152>
! 1980: <1F> <00D8>
! 1981: <21> <0021>
! 1982: <22> <201D>
! 1983: <27> <2019>
! 1984: <3C> <00A1>
! 1985: <3D> <003D>
! 1986: <3E> <00BF>
! 1987: <5C> <201C>
! 1988: <5F> <02D9>
! 1989: <60> <2018>
! 1990: <7D> <02DD>
! 1991: <7E> <007E>
! 1992: <7F> <00A8>
! 1993: endbfchar
! 1994: endcmap
! 1995: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
! 1996: end
! 1997: end
! 1998: %%EndResource
! 1999: %%EOF
! 2000: }\endgroup
! 2001: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
! 2002: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
! 2003: }%
! 2004: %
! 2005: % \cmapOT1IT
! 2006: \begingroup
! 2007: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
! 2008: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
! 2009: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 2010: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 2011: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
! 2012: %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
! 2013: %%Version: 1.000
! 2014: %%EndComments
! 2015: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
! 2016: 12 dict begin
! 2017: begincmap
! 2018: /CIDSystemInfo
! 2019: << /Registry (TeX)
! 2020: /Ordering (OT1IT)
! 2021: /Supplement 0
! 2022: >> def
! 2023: /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
! 2024: /CMapType 2 def
! 2025: 1 begincodespacerange
! 2026: <00> <7F>
! 2027: endcodespacerange
! 2028: 8 beginbfrange
! 2029: <00> <01> <0393>
! 2030: <09> <0A> <03A8>
! 2031: <25> <26> <0025>
! 2032: <28> <3B> <0028>
! 2033: <3F> <5B> <003F>
! 2034: <5D> <5E> <005D>
! 2035: <61> <7A> <0061>
! 2036: <7B> <7C> <2013>
! 2037: endbfrange
! 2038: 42 beginbfchar
! 2039: <02> <0398>
! 2040: <03> <039B>
! 2041: <04> <039E>
! 2042: <05> <03A0>
! 2043: <06> <03A3>
! 2044: <07> <03D2>
! 2045: <08> <03A6>
! 2046: <0B> <00660066>
! 2047: <0C> <00660069>
! 2048: <0D> <0066006C>
! 2049: <0E> <006600660069>
! 2050: <0F> <00660066006C>
! 2051: <10> <0131>
! 2052: <11> <0237>
! 2053: <12> <0060>
! 2054: <13> <00B4>
! 2055: <14> <02C7>
! 2056: <15> <02D8>
! 2057: <16> <00AF>
! 2058: <17> <02DA>
! 2059: <18> <00B8>
! 2060: <19> <00DF>
! 2061: <1A> <00E6>
! 2062: <1B> <0153>
! 2063: <1C> <00F8>
! 2064: <1D> <00C6>
! 2065: <1E> <0152>
! 2066: <1F> <00D8>
! 2067: <21> <0021>
! 2068: <22> <201D>
! 2069: <23> <0023>
! 2070: <24> <00A3>
! 2071: <27> <2019>
! 2072: <3C> <00A1>
! 2073: <3D> <003D>
! 2074: <3E> <00BF>
! 2075: <5C> <201C>
! 2076: <5F> <02D9>
! 2077: <60> <2018>
! 2078: <7D> <02DD>
! 2079: <7E> <007E>
! 2080: <7F> <00A8>
! 2081: endbfchar
! 2082: endcmap
! 2083: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
! 2084: end
! 2085: end
! 2086: %%EndResource
! 2087: %%EOF
! 2088: }\endgroup
! 2089: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
! 2090: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
! 2091: }%
! 2092: %
! 2093: % \cmapOT1TT
! 2094: \begingroup
! 2095: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
! 2096: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
! 2097: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 2098: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
! 2099: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
! 2100: %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
! 2101: %%Version: 1.000
! 2102: %%EndComments
! 2103: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
! 2104: 12 dict begin
! 2105: begincmap
! 2106: /CIDSystemInfo
! 2107: << /Registry (TeX)
! 2108: /Ordering (OT1TT)
! 2109: /Supplement 0
! 2110: >> def
! 2111: /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
! 2112: /CMapType 2 def
! 2113: 1 begincodespacerange
! 2114: <00> <7F>
! 2115: endcodespacerange
! 2116: 5 beginbfrange
! 2117: <00> <01> <0393>
! 2118: <09> <0A> <03A8>
! 2119: <21> <26> <0021>
! 2120: <28> <5F> <0028>
! 2121: <61> <7E> <0061>
! 2122: endbfrange
! 2123: 32 beginbfchar
! 2124: <02> <0398>
! 2125: <03> <039B>
! 2126: <04> <039E>
! 2127: <05> <03A0>
! 2128: <06> <03A3>
! 2129: <07> <03D2>
! 2130: <08> <03A6>
! 2131: <0B> <2191>
! 2132: <0C> <2193>
! 2133: <0D> <0027>
! 2134: <0E> <00A1>
! 2135: <0F> <00BF>
! 2136: <10> <0131>
! 2137: <11> <0237>
! 2138: <12> <0060>
! 2139: <13> <00B4>
! 2140: <14> <02C7>
! 2141: <15> <02D8>
! 2142: <16> <00AF>
! 2143: <17> <02DA>
! 2144: <18> <00B8>
! 2145: <19> <00DF>
! 2146: <1A> <00E6>
! 2147: <1B> <0153>
! 2148: <1C> <00F8>
! 2149: <1D> <00C6>
! 2150: <1E> <0152>
! 2151: <1F> <00D8>
! 2152: <20> <2423>
! 2153: <27> <2019>
! 2154: <60> <2018>
! 2155: <7F> <00A8>
! 2156: endbfchar
! 2157: endcmap
! 2158: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
! 2159: end
! 2160: end
! 2161: %%EndResource
! 2162: %%EOF
! 2163: }\endgroup
! 2164: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
! 2165: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
! 2166: }%
! 2167: \fi\fi
! 2168:
! 2169:
! 2170: % Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
! 2171: % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
! 2172: % encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
! 2173: % Example:
! 2174: % #1 = \textrm
! 2175: % #2 = \rmshape
! 2176: % #3 = 10
! 2177: % #4 = \mainmagstep
! 2178: % #5 = OT1
! 2179: %
! 2180: \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
! 2181: \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
! 2182: \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
! 2183: }
! 2184: % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
! 2185: \let\cmap\gobble
! 2186: %
! 2187: % (end of cmaps)
! 2188:
! 2189: % Use cm as the default font prefix.
! 2190: % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
! 2191: % before you read in texinfo.tex.
! 2192: \ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
! 2193: \def\fontprefix{cm}
! 2194: \fi
! 2195: % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
! 2196: \def\rmshape{r}
! 2197: \def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold
! 2198: \def\bfshape{b}
! 2199: \def\bxshape{bx}
! 2200: \def\ttshape{tt}
! 2201: \def\ttbshape{tt}
! 2202: \def\ttslshape{sltt}
! 2203: \def\itshape{ti}
! 2204: \def\itbshape{bxti}
! 2205: \def\slshape{sl}
! 2206: \def\slbshape{bxsl}
! 2207: \def\sfshape{ss}
! 2208: \def\sfbshape{ss}
! 2209: \def\scshape{csc}
! 2210: \def\scbshape{csc}
! 2211:
! 2212: % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.)
! 2213: %
! 2214: \def\definetextfontsizexi{%
! 2215: % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
! 2216: \def\textnominalsize{11pt}
! 2217: \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
! 2218: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2219: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
! 2220: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2221: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
! 2222: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2223: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2224: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2225: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
! 2226: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 2227: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 2228: \def\textecsize{1095}
! 2229:
! 2230: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
! 2231: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2232: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 2233: \setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2234: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 2235: \def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf
! 2236: \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf}
! 2237:
! 2238: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
! 2239: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
! 2240: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2241: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2242: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2243: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2244: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2245: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2246: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2247: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
! 2248: \font\smalli=cmmi9
! 2249: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
! 2250: \def\smallecsize{0900}
! 2251:
! 2252: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
! 2253: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
! 2254: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2255: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2256: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
! 2257: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2258: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2259: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2260: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
! 2261: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
! 2262: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
! 2263: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
! 2264: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
! 2265:
! 2266: % Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt).
! 2267: \def\sevennominalsize{7pt}
! 2268: \setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1}
! 2269: \setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
! 2270: \setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2271: \setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2272: \setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2273: \setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2274: \setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2275: \setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
! 2276: \font\seveni=cmmi7
! 2277: \font\sevensy=cmsy7
! 2278: \def\sevenecsize{0700}
! 2279:
! 2280: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
! 2281: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
! 2282: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
! 2283: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
! 2284: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
! 2285: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
! 2286: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
! 2287: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2288: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
! 2289: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
! 2290: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
! 2291: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
! 2292: \def\titleecsize{2074}
! 2293:
! 2294: % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
! 2295: \def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
! 2296: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 2297: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
! 2298: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
! 2299: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
! 2300: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
! 2301: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
! 2302: \let\chapbf=\chaprm
! 2303: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
! 2304: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
! 2305: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
! 2306: \def\chapecsize{1728}
! 2307:
! 2308: % Section fonts (14.4pt).
! 2309: \def\secnominalsize{14pt}
! 2310: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2311: \setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2312: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
! 2313: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 2314: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 2315: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
! 2316: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2317: \let\secbf\secrm
! 2318: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 2319: \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
! 2320: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
! 2321: \def\sececsize{1440}
! 2322:
! 2323: % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
! 2324: \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
! 2325: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
! 2326: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
! 2327: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
! 2328: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
! 2329: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
! 2330: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
! 2331: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
! 2332: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
! 2333: \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
! 2334: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
! 2335: \def\ssececsize{1200}
! 2336:
! 2337: % Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt).
! 2338: \def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
! 2339: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2340: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2341: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2342: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2343: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2344: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2345: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2346: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2347: \font\reducedi=cmmi10
! 2348: \font\reducedsy=cmsy10
! 2349: \def\reducedecsize{1000}
! 2350:
! 2351: \textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
! 2352: \textfonts % reset the current fonts
! 2353: \rm
! 2354: } % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
! 2355:
! 2356:
! 2357: % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
! 2358: % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
! 2359: % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
! 2360: % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
! 2361: %
! 2362: \def\definetextfontsizex{%
! 2363: % Text fonts (10pt).
! 2364: \def\textnominalsize{10pt}
! 2365: \edef\mainmagstep{1000}
! 2366: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2367: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
! 2368: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2369: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
! 2370: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2371: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2372: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
! 2373: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
! 2374: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 2375: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 2376: \def\textecsize{1000}
! 2377:
! 2378: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
! 2379: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
! 2380: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
! 2381: \setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
! 2382: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
! 2383: \def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf
! 2384: \let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf}
! 2385:
! 2386: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
! 2387: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
! 2388: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2389: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2390: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2391: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2392: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2393: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2394: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2395: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
! 2396: \font\smalli=cmmi9
! 2397: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
! 2398: \def\smallecsize{0900}
! 2399:
! 2400: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
! 2401: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
! 2402: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2403: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2404: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
! 2405: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2406: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2407: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 2408: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
! 2409: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
! 2410: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
! 2411: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
! 2412: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
! 2413:
! 2414: % Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt).
! 2415: \def\sevennominalsize{7pt}
! 2416: \setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1}
! 2417: \setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
! 2418: \setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2419: \setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2420: \setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2421: \setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2422: \setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1}
! 2423: \setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
! 2424: \font\seveni=cmmi7
! 2425: \font\sevensy=cmsy7
! 2426: \def\sevenecsize{0700}
! 2427:
! 2428: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
! 2429: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
! 2430: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
! 2431: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
! 2432: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
! 2433: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
! 2434: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
! 2435: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2436: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
! 2437: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
! 2438: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
! 2439: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
! 2440: \def\titleecsize{2074}
! 2441:
! 2442: % Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
! 2443: \def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
! 2444: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2445: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
! 2446: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 2447: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 2448: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
! 2449: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2450: \let\chapbf\chaprm
! 2451: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
! 2452: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
! 2453: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
! 2454: \def\chapecsize{1440}
! 2455:
! 2456: % Section fonts (12pt).
! 2457: \def\secnominalsize{12pt}
! 2458: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
! 2459: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
! 2460: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2461: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2462: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
! 2463: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
! 2464: \let\secbf\secrm
! 2465: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
! 2466: \font\seci=cmmi12
! 2467: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
! 2468: \def\sececsize{1200}
! 2469:
! 2470: % Subsection fonts (10pt).
! 2471: \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
! 2472: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2473: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2474: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2475: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2476: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2477: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2478: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
! 2479: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
! 2480: \font\sseci=cmmi10
! 2481: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10
! 2482: \def\ssececsize{1000}
! 2483:
! 2484: % Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt).
! 2485: \def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
! 2486: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2487: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2488: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2489: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
! 2490: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2491: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
! 2492: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
! 2493: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
! 2494: \font\reducedi=cmmi9
! 2495: \font\reducedsy=cmsy9
! 2496: \def\reducedecsize{0900}
! 2497:
! 2498: \divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs
! 2499: \textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM
! 2500: \textfonts % reset the current fonts
! 2501: \rm
! 2502: } % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
! 2503:
! 2504: % Fonts for short table of contents.
! 2505: \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
! 2506: \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
! 2507: \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
! 2508: \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
! 2509:
! 2510:
! 2511: % We provide the user-level command
! 2512: % @fonttextsize 10
! 2513: % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
! 2514: %
! 2515: \def\xiword{11}
! 2516: \def\xword{10}
! 2517: \def\xwordpt{10pt}
! 2518: %
! 2519: \parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
! 2520: \def\textsizearg{#1}%
! 2521: %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
! 2522: %
! 2523: % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
! 2524: % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
! 2525: %
! 2526: \begingroup \globaldefs=1
! 2527: \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
! 2528: \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
! 2529: \else
! 2530: \errhelp=\EMsimple
! 2531: \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
! 2532: \fi\fi
! 2533: \endgroup
! 2534: }
! 2535:
! 2536: %
! 2537: % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
! 2538: % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
! 2539: % italics, not bold italics.
! 2540: %
! 2541: \def\setfontstyle#1{%
! 2542: \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
! 2543: \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font
! 2544: }
! 2545:
! 2546: \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
! 2547: \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
! 2548: \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
! 2549: \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
! 2550: \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}\def\ttstylename{tt}
! 2551:
! 2552: % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
! 2553: % So we set up a \sf.
! 2554: \newfam\sffam
! 2555: \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
! 2556:
! 2557: % We don't need math for this font style.
! 2558: \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
! 2559:
! 2560:
! 2561: % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
! 2562: % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.
! 2563: % We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need.
! 2564: %
! 2565: \def\resetmathfonts{%
! 2566: \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont
! 2567: \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont
! 2568: \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont
! 2569: %
! 2570: % Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless
! 2571: % of the current font size.
! 2572: \scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy
! 2573: \scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl
! 2574: \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt
! 2575: \scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf
! 2576: }
! 2577:
! 2578: %
! 2579:
! 2580: % The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings
! 2581: % of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs
! 2582: % to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm)
! 2583: % commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font.
! 2584: %
! 2585: % The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for italics
! 2586: % in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only.
! 2587: %
! 2588: % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
! 2589: % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used
! 2590: % in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
! 2591: %
! 2592: % This all needs generalizing, badly.
! 2593: %
! 2594:
! 2595: \def\assignfonts#1{%
! 2596: \expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname
! 2597: \expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname
! 2598: \expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname
! 2599: \expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname
! 2600: \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname
! 2601: \expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname
! 2602: \expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname
! 2603: \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname
! 2604: \expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname
! 2605: \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname
! 2606: }
! 2607:
! 2608: \newif\ifrmisbold
! 2609:
! 2610: % Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size
! 2611: % in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for
! 2612: % normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size.
! 2613: \def\switchtolllsize{%
! 2614: \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}%
! 2615: \ifrmisbold
! 2616: \let\rmfont\bffont
! 2617: \fi
! 2618: \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname
! 2619: }%
! 2620:
! 2621: \def\switchtolsize{%
! 2622: \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}%
! 2623: \ifrmisbold
! 2624: \let\rmfont\bffont
! 2625: \fi
! 2626: \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname
! 2627: }%
! 2628:
! 2629: \def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{%
! 2630: \expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{%
! 2631: \def\curfontsize{#1}%
! 2632: \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}%
! 2633: \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname
! 2634: \assignfonts{#1}%
! 2635: \resetmathfonts
! 2636: \setleading{#4}%
! 2637: }}
! 2638:
! 2639: \definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false}
! 2640: \definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true}
! 2641: \definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true}
! 2642: \definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true}
! 2643: \definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true}
! 2644: \definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false}
! 2645: \definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false}
! 2646: \definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false}
! 2647:
! 2648: \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
! 2649: \let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts
! 2650: \let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts
! 2651:
! 2652: % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
! 2653: \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
! 2654: \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
! 2655:
! 2656: % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
! 2657: \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
! 2658:
! 2659: % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
! 2660: % can fit this many characters:
! 2661: % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
! 2662: % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
! 2663: % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
! 2664: % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
! 2665: % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
! 2666: %
! 2667: % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
! 2668: % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
! 2669: % --karl, 24jan03.
! 2670:
! 2671: % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
! 2672: %
! 2673: \definetextfontsizexi
! 2674:
! 2675:
! 2676: \message{markup,}
! 2677:
! 2678: % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
! 2679: % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
! 2680: % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
! 2681: % this property, we can check that font parameter.
! 2682: %
! 2683: \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
! 2684:
! 2685: % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
! 2686: % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
! 2687: % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
! 2688: % style.
! 2689:
! 2690: \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
! 2691:
! 2692: \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
! 2693: \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
! 2694: \markupstylesetup
! 2695: }
! 2696:
! 2697: \let\markupstylesetup\empty
! 2698:
! 2699: \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
! 2700: \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
! 2701: \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
! 2702: \def#1%
! 2703: }
! 2704:
! 2705: % Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
! 2706: \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
! 2707: \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
! 2708: \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
! 2709: \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
! 2710: }
! 2711:
! 2712: \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
! 2713: \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
! 2714: \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
! 2715: \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
! 2716: }
! 2717:
! 2718: {
! 2719: \catcode`\'=\active
! 2720: \catcode`\`=\active
! 2721:
! 2722: \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
! 2723: \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
! 2724:
! 2725: \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
! 2726: \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
! 2727: }
! 2728:
! 2729: \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
! 2730: \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
! 2731: %
! 2732: \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
! 2733: \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
! 2734: %
! 2735: \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft
! 2736: \let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright
! 2737: %
! 2738: \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
! 2739: \let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
! 2740: %
! 2741: \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
! 2742: \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
! 2743: %
! 2744: \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
! 2745: \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
! 2746:
! 2747: % Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
! 2748: % (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
! 2749: % The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
! 2750: % works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
! 2751: % lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
! 2752: %
! 2753: \def\codequoteright{%
! 2754: \ifmonospace
! 2755: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
! 2756: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
! 2757: '%
! 2758: \else \char'15 \fi
! 2759: \else \char'15 \fi
! 2760: \else
! 2761: '%
! 2762: \fi
! 2763: }
! 2764: %
! 2765: % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
! 2766: % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
! 2767: % the code environments to do likewise.
! 2768: %
! 2769: \def\codequoteleft{%
! 2770: \ifmonospace
! 2771: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
! 2772: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
! 2773: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
! 2774: % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
! 2775: \relax`%
! 2776: \else \char'22 \fi
! 2777: \else \char'22 \fi
! 2778: \else
! 2779: \relax`%
! 2780: \fi
! 2781: }
! 2782:
! 2783: % Commands to set the quote options.
! 2784: %
! 2785: \parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
! 2786: \def\temp{#1}%
! 2787: \ifx\temp\onword
! 2788: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
! 2789: = t%
! 2790: \else\ifx\temp\offword
! 2791: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
! 2792: = \relax
! 2793: \else
! 2794: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 2795: \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
! 2796: \fi\fi
! 2797: }
! 2798: %
! 2799: \parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
! 2800: \def\temp{#1}%
! 2801: \ifx\temp\onword
! 2802: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
! 2803: = t%
! 2804: \else\ifx\temp\offword
! 2805: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
! 2806: = \relax
! 2807: \else
! 2808: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 2809: \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
! 2810: \fi\fi
! 2811: }
! 2812:
! 2813: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
! 2814: \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
! 2815:
! 2816: % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
! 2817: \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
! 2818:
! 2819: % Font commands.
! 2820:
! 2821: % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
! 2822: % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
! 2823: % and 2) do not add an italic correction.
! 2824: \def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
! 2825: \ifusingtt
! 2826: {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
! 2827: {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
! 2828: \next
! 2829: }
! 2830: \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
! 2831: \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
! 2832:
! 2833: % Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
! 2834: % character) is such as not to need one.
! 2835: \def\smartitaliccorrection{%
! 2836: \ifx\next,%
! 2837: \else\ifx\next-%
! 2838: \else\ifx\next.%
! 2839: \else\ifx\next\.%
! 2840: \else\ifx\next\comma%
! 2841: \else\ptexslash
! 2842: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 2843: \aftersmartic
! 2844: }
! 2845:
! 2846: % Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns.
! 2847: \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
! 2848:
! 2849: % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
! 2850: % ttsl for book titles, do we?
! 2851: \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
! 2852:
! 2853: \def\aftersmartic{}
! 2854: \def\var#1{%
! 2855: \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
! 2856: \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
! 2857: \smartslanted{#1}%
! 2858: }
! 2859:
! 2860: \let\i=\smartitalic
! 2861: \let\slanted=\smartslanted
! 2862: \let\dfn=\smartslanted
! 2863: \let\emph=\smartitalic
! 2864:
! 2865: % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
! 2866: \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
! 2867: \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
! 2868: \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
! 2869:
! 2870: % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
! 2871: \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
! 2872: \let\strong=\b
! 2873:
! 2874: % @sansserif, explicit sans.
! 2875: \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
! 2876:
! 2877: % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
! 2878: % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
! 2879: % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
! 2880: %
! 2881: \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
! 2882: \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
! 2883:
! 2884: % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
! 2885: % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
! 2886: % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
! 2887: %
! 2888: \catcode`@=11
! 2889: \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
! 2890: \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m
! 2891: \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m
! 2892: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
! 2893: }
! 2894: \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
! 2895: \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
! 2896: \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
! 2897: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
! 2898: }
! 2899: \catcode`@=\other
! 2900: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
! 2901:
! 2902: % @t, explicit typewriter.
! 2903: \def\t#1{%
! 2904: {\tt \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
! 2905: \null
! 2906: }
! 2907:
! 2908: % @samp.
! 2909: \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
! 2910:
! 2911: % @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
! 2912: \let\indicateurl=\samp
! 2913:
! 2914: % @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
! 2915: % size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
! 2916: % This is a subroutine for that.
! 2917: \def\tclose#1{%
! 2918: {%
! 2919: % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
! 2920: \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
! 2921: %
! 2922: % Switch to typewriter.
! 2923: \tt
! 2924: %
! 2925: % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
! 2926: \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
! 2927: %
! 2928: % Turn off hyphenation.
! 2929: \nohyphenation
! 2930: %
! 2931: \plainfrenchspacing
! 2932: #1%
! 2933: }%
! 2934: \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
! 2935: }
! 2936:
! 2937: % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
! 2938: % (But see \codedashfinish below.)
! 2939: % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
! 2940: % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
! 2941: %
! 2942: % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
! 2943: % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
! 2944: % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
! 2945: % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms.
! 2946: {
! 2947: \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
! 2948: \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
! 2949: \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
! 2950: %
! 2951: \global\def\code{\begingroup
! 2952: \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
! 2953: % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
! 2954: \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
! 2955: \ifallowcodebreaks
! 2956: \let-\codedash
! 2957: \let_\codeunder
! 2958: \else
! 2959: \let-\normaldash
! 2960: \let_\realunder
! 2961: \fi
! 2962: % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break
! 2963: % after the hyphen.
! 2964: \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash
! 2965: %
! 2966: \codex
! 2967: }
! 2968: %
! 2969: \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish}
! 2970: \gdef\codedashfinish{%
! 2971: \normaldash % always output the dash character itself.
! 2972: %
! 2973: % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless
! 2974: % (a) the next character is a -, or
! 2975: % (b) the preceding character is a -.
! 2976: % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -.
! 2977: % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b.
! 2978: \ifx\next\codedash \else
! 2979: \ifx\codedashprev\codedash
! 2980: \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi
! 2981: \fi
! 2982: % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a
! 2983: % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}.
! 2984: \global\let\codedashprev= \next
! 2985: }
! 2986: }
! 2987: \def\normaldash{-}
! 2988: %
! 2989: \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
! 2990:
! 2991: \def\codeunder{%
! 2992: % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
! 2993: % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
! 2994: % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
! 2995: % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
! 2996: \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
! 2997: \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
! 2998: \else\normalunderscore \fi
! 2999: \discretionary{}{}{}}%
! 3000: {\_}%
! 3001: }
! 3002:
! 3003: % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
! 3004: % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad.
! 3005: % @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
! 3006: % and _ on and off.
! 3007: %
! 3008: \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
! 3009:
! 3010: \def\keywordtrue{true}
! 3011: \def\keywordfalse{false}
! 3012:
! 3013: \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
! 3014: \def\txiarg{#1}%
! 3015: \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
! 3016: \allowcodebreakstrue
! 3017: \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
! 3018: \allowcodebreaksfalse
! 3019: \else
! 3020: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 3021: \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
! 3022: \fi\fi
! 3023: }
! 3024:
! 3025: % For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
! 3026: % so use \code rather than \samp.
! 3027: \let\command=\code
! 3028: \let\env=\code
! 3029: \let\file=\code
! 3030: \let\option=\code
! 3031:
! 3032: % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional
! 3033: % (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and
! 3034: % an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in
! 3035: % addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
! 3036:
! 3037: % TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second
! 3038: % arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target).
! 3039: \newif\ifurefurlonlylink
! 3040:
! 3041: % The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected
! 3042: % places within the url. (There used to be another version, which
! 3043: % didn't support automatic breaking.)
! 3044: \def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
! 3045: \let\uref=\urefbreak
! 3046: %
! 3047: \def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
! 3048: \def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
! 3049: \unsepspaces
! 3050: \pdfurl{#1}%
! 3051: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 3052: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 3053: \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
! 3054: \else
! 3055: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg
! 3056: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 3057: \ifpdf
! 3058: % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX
! 3059: \ifurefurlonlylink
! 3060: % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
! 3061: \unhbox0
! 3062: \else
! 3063: % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
! 3064: % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
! 3065: \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
! 3066: \fi
! 3067: \else
! 3068: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 3069: \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url
! 3070: \else
! 3071: % For XeTeX
! 3072: \ifurefurlonlylink
! 3073: % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
! 3074: \unhbox0
! 3075: \else
! 3076: % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
! 3077: % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
! 3078: \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
! 3079: \fi
! 3080: \fi
! 3081: \fi
! 3082: \else
! 3083: \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
! 3084: \fi
! 3085: \fi
! 3086: \endlink
! 3087: \endgroup}
! 3088:
! 3089: % Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
! 3090: \def\urefcatcodes{%
! 3091: \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active
! 3092: \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active
! 3093: \catcode`\/=\active
! 3094: }
! 3095: {
! 3096: \urefcatcodes
! 3097: %
! 3098: \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
! 3099: \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
! 3100: \urefcatcodes
! 3101: \let&\urefcodeamp
! 3102: \let.\urefcodedot
! 3103: \let#\urefcodehash
! 3104: \let?\urefcodequest
! 3105: \let/\urefcodeslash
! 3106: \codex
! 3107: }
! 3108: %
! 3109: % By default, they are just regular characters.
! 3110: \global\def&{\normalamp}
! 3111: \global\def.{\normaldot}
! 3112: \global\def#{\normalhash}
! 3113: \global\def?{\normalquest}
! 3114: \global\def/{\normalslash}
! 3115: }
! 3116:
! 3117: \def\urefcodeamp{\urefprebreak \&\urefpostbreak}
! 3118: \def\urefcodedot{\urefprebreak .\urefpostbreak}
! 3119: \def\urefcodehash{\urefprebreak \#\urefpostbreak}
! 3120: \def\urefcodequest{\urefprebreak ?\urefpostbreak}
! 3121: \def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
! 3122: {
! 3123: \catcode`\/=\active
! 3124: \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
! 3125: \urefprebreak \slashChar
! 3126: % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
! 3127: % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
! 3128: \ifx\next/\else \urefpostbreak \fi
! 3129: }
! 3130: }
! 3131:
! 3132: % By default we'll break after the special characters, but some people like to
! 3133: % break before the special chars, so allow that. Also allow no breaking at
! 3134: % all, for manual control.
! 3135: %
! 3136: \parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
! 3137: \def\txiarg{#1}%
! 3138: \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
! 3139: \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
! 3140: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
! 3141: \def\urefprebreak{\urefallowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
! 3142: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
! 3143: \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\urefallowbreak}
! 3144: \else
! 3145: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 3146: \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
! 3147: \fi\fi\fi
! 3148: }
! 3149: \def\wordafter{after}
! 3150: \def\wordbefore{before}
! 3151: \def\wordnone{none}
! 3152:
! 3153: % Allow a ragged right output to aid breaking long URL's. There can
! 3154: % be a break at the \allowbreak with no extra glue (if the existing stretch in
! 3155: % the line is sufficient), a break at the \penalty100 with extra glue added
! 3156: % at the end of the line, or no break at all here.
! 3157: % Changing the value of the penalty and/or the amount of stretch affects how
! 3158: % preferable one choice is over the other.
! 3159: \def\urefallowbreak{%
! 3160: \allowbreak
! 3161: \hskip 0pt plus 2 em\relax
! 3162: \penalty300
! 3163: \hskip 0pt plus -2 em\relax
! 3164: }
! 3165:
! 3166: \urefbreakstyle after
! 3167:
! 3168: % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
! 3169: %
! 3170: \let\url=\uref
! 3171:
! 3172: % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
! 3173: % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
! 3174: %
! 3175: %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
! 3176: \ifpdforxetex
! 3177: \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
! 3178: \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
! 3179: \unsepspaces
! 3180: \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
! 3181: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 3182: \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
! 3183: \endlink
! 3184: \endgroup}
! 3185: \else
! 3186: \let\email=\uref
! 3187: \fi
! 3188:
! 3189: % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
! 3190: % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
! 3191: % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
! 3192: \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
! 3193: \def\txiarg{#1}%
! 3194: \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
! 3195: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
! 3196: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
! 3197: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
! 3198: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
! 3199: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
! 3200: \else
! 3201: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 3202: \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
! 3203: \fi\fi\fi
! 3204: }
! 3205: \def\worddistinct{distinct}
! 3206: \def\wordexample{example}
! 3207: \def\wordcode{code}
! 3208:
! 3209: % Default is `distinct'.
! 3210: \kbdinputstyle distinct
! 3211:
! 3212: % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
! 3213: % then @kbd has no effect.
! 3214: \def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}}
! 3215:
! 3216: \def\xkey{\key}
! 3217: \def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
! 3218: \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
! 3219: \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
! 3220: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
! 3221: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
! 3222: }
! 3223:
! 3224: % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
! 3225: %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
! 3226: %\font\keysy=cmsy9
! 3227: %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
! 3228: % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
! 3229: % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
! 3230: % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
! 3231: % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
! 3232: % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
! 3233:
! 3234: % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
! 3235: % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
! 3236: % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
! 3237: %
! 3238: \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
! 3239: \nohyphenation
! 3240: \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
! 3241: #1}\null}
! 3242:
! 3243: % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
! 3244: \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
! 3245:
! 3246: % @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
! 3247: \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
! 3248: \def\click{\arrow}
! 3249:
! 3250: % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
! 3251: % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
! 3252: %
! 3253: \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
! 3254:
! 3255: % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
! 3256: % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
! 3257: % all-uppercase.
! 3258: %
! 3259: \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
! 3260: \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
! 3261: {\switchtolsize #1}%
! 3262: \def\temp{#2}%
! 3263: \ifx\temp\empty \else
! 3264: \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
! 3265: \fi
! 3266: \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
! 3267: }
! 3268:
! 3269: % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
! 3270: % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
! 3271: %
! 3272: \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
! 3273: \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
! 3274: {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
! 3275: \def\temp{#2}%
! 3276: \ifx\temp\empty \else
! 3277: \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
! 3278: \fi
! 3279: \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
! 3280: }
! 3281:
! 3282: % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
! 3283: %
! 3284: \def\asis#1{#1}
! 3285:
! 3286: % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
! 3287: %
! 3288: % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
! 3289: % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
! 3290: % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
! 3291: % which is what @var uses.
! 3292: {
! 3293: \catcode`\_ = \active
! 3294: \gdef\mathunderscore{%
! 3295: \catcode`\_=\active
! 3296: \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
! 3297: }
! 3298: }
! 3299: % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
! 3300: % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
! 3301: % particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
! 3302: %
! 3303: % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
! 3304: \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
! 3305: %
! 3306: \def\math{%
! 3307: \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already
! 3308: \tex
! 3309: \mathunderscore
! 3310: \let\\ = \mathbackslash
! 3311: \mathactive
! 3312: % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
! 3313: \let\"=\ddot
! 3314: \let\'=\acute
! 3315: \let\==\bar
! 3316: \let\^=\hat
! 3317: \let\`=\grave
! 3318: \let\u=\breve
! 3319: \let\v=\check
! 3320: \let\~=\tilde
! 3321: \let\dotaccent=\dot
! 3322: % have to provide another name for sup operator
! 3323: \let\mathopsup=\sup
! 3324: $\expandafter\finishmath\fi
! 3325: }
! 3326: \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
! 3327:
! 3328: % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
! 3329: % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
! 3330: % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
! 3331: %
! 3332: {
! 3333: \catcode`^ = \active
! 3334: \catcode`< = \active
! 3335: \catcode`> = \active
! 3336: \catcode`+ = \active
! 3337: \catcode`' = \active
! 3338: \gdef\mathactive{%
! 3339: \let^ = \ptexhat
! 3340: \let< = \ptexless
! 3341: \let> = \ptexgtr
! 3342: \let+ = \ptexplus
! 3343: \let' = \ptexquoteright
! 3344: }
! 3345: }
! 3346:
! 3347: % for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript.
! 3348: % If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch
! 3349: % into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the
! 3350: % one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not
! 3351: % fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices.
! 3352: %
! 3353: \def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi}
! 3354: \def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}%
! 3355: %
! 3356: \def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi}
! 3357: \def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}%
! 3358:
! 3359: % @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
! 3360: % Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
! 3361: % except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
! 3362: %
! 3363: \def\outfmtnametex{tex}
! 3364: %
! 3365: \long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
! 3366: \long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
! 3367: \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
! 3368: \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
! 3369: }
! 3370: %
! 3371: % @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if
! 3372: % FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT.
! 3373: \long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish}
! 3374: \long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{%
! 3375: \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
! 3376: \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi
! 3377: }
! 3378: %
! 3379: % For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
! 3380: % setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for
! 3381: % example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
! 3382: % ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal
! 3383: % *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
! 3384: % well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the
! 3385: % delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
! 3386: %
! 3387: \long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
! 3388: \long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
! 3389: \def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
! 3390: \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
! 3391: \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
! 3392: \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
! 3393: }
! 3394:
! 3395: % @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set.
! 3396: %
! 3397: \long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish}
! 3398: \long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{%
! 3399: \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
! 3400: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax
! 3401: \else\ignorespaces#2\fi
! 3402: }
! 3403:
! 3404: % @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set.
! 3405: %
! 3406: \long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish}
! 3407: \long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{%
! 3408: \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
! 3409: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi
! 3410: }
! 3411:
! 3412:
! 3413: \message{glyphs,}
! 3414: % and logos.
! 3415:
! 3416: % @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
! 3417: \def\@{\char64 }
! 3418: \let\atchar=\@
! 3419:
! 3420: % @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
! 3421: \def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}}
! 3422: \def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}}
! 3423: \let\{=\lbracechar
! 3424: \let\}=\rbracechar
! 3425:
! 3426: % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
! 3427: \let\comma = ,
! 3428:
! 3429: % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
! 3430: % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
! 3431: \let\, = \ptexc
! 3432: \let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
! 3433: \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
! 3434: \let\tieaccent = \ptext
! 3435: \let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
! 3436: \let\udotaccent = \d
! 3437:
! 3438: % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
! 3439: % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
! 3440: \def\questiondown{?`}
! 3441: \def\exclamdown{!`}
! 3442: \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}}
! 3443: \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}}
! 3444:
! 3445: % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
! 3446: \def\imacro{i}
! 3447: \def\jmacro{j}
! 3448: \def\dotless#1{%
! 3449: \def\temp{#1}%
! 3450: \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
! 3451: \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
! 3452: \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
! 3453: \fi\fi
! 3454: }
! 3455:
! 3456: % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
! 3457: % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
! 3458: %
! 3459: \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
! 3460:
! 3461: % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
! 3462: % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
! 3463: % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
! 3464: % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
! 3465: % \scriptscriptstyle).
! 3466: %
! 3467: \def\LaTeX{%
! 3468: L\kern-.36em
! 3469: {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
! 3470: \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
! 3471: \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
! 3472: % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
! 3473: % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
! 3474: \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
! 3475: \else
! 3476: % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
! 3477: \switchtolllsize A%
! 3478: \fi
! 3479: }%
! 3480: \vss
! 3481: }}%
! 3482: \kern-.15em
! 3483: \TeX
! 3484: }
! 3485:
! 3486: % Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode
! 3487: % unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here,
! 3488: % but safer, and can't hurt.
! 3489: \def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi}
! 3490: \def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$}
! 3491: %
! 3492: \def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet}
! 3493: \def\geq{\ensuremath\ge}
! 3494: \def\leq{\ensuremath\le}
! 3495: \def\minus{\ensuremath-}
! 3496:
! 3497: % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
! 3498: % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
! 3499: % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
! 3500: % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
! 3501: % whichever is larger.
! 3502: %
! 3503: \def\dots{%
! 3504: \leavevmode
! 3505: \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
! 3506: \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
! 3507: \dimen0 = \wd0
! 3508: \else
! 3509: \dimen0 = 1.5em
! 3510: \fi
! 3511: \hbox to \dimen0{%
! 3512: \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
! 3513: .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
! 3514: .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
! 3515: .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
! 3516: }%
! 3517: }
! 3518:
! 3519: % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
! 3520: %
! 3521: \def\enddots{%
! 3522: \dots
! 3523: \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
! 3524: }
! 3525:
! 3526: % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
! 3527: %
! 3528: % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
! 3529: % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
! 3530: %
! 3531: \def\point{$\star$}
! 3532: \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
! 3533: \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
! 3534: \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
! 3535: \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
! 3536: \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
! 3537:
! 3538: % The @error{} command.
! 3539: % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
! 3540: %
! 3541: \newbox\errorbox
! 3542: %
! 3543: {\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
! 3544: \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
! 3545: % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
! 3546: \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
! 3547: %
! 3548: \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
! 3549: \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
! 3550: \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
! 3551: \vbox{%
! 3552: \hrule height\dimen2
! 3553: \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
! 3554: \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
! 3555: \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
! 3556: \hrule height\dimen2}
! 3557: \hfil}
! 3558: %
! 3559: \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
! 3560:
! 3561: % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
! 3562: %
! 3563: \def\pounds{\ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"BF}\else{\it\$}\fi}
! 3564:
! 3565: % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
! 3566: % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
! 3567: % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
! 3568: % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
! 3569: % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
! 3570: %
! 3571: % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
! 3572: % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
! 3573: % font height.
! 3574: %
! 3575: % feymr - regular
! 3576: % feymo - slanted
! 3577: % feybr - bold
! 3578: % feybo - bold slanted
! 3579: %
! 3580: % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
! 3581: % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
! 3582: % Hmm.
! 3583: %
! 3584: % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
! 3585: % Hope not.
! 3586: %
! 3587: %
! 3588: \def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
! 3589: \def\eurofont{%
! 3590: % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
! 3591: % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
! 3592: % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
! 3593: % font installed.
! 3594: %
! 3595: % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
! 3596: % that to the current nominal size.
! 3597: %
! 3598: % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
! 3599: % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
! 3600: %
! 3601: \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
! 3602: %
! 3603: \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
! 3604: % bold:
! 3605: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
! 3606: \else
! 3607: % regular:
! 3608: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
! 3609: \fi
! 3610: \thiseurofont
! 3611: }
! 3612:
! 3613: % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
! 3614: % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
! 3615: % the redefinition.
! 3616: %
! 3617: % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
! 3618: \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
! 3619: \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
! 3620: \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
! 3621: \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
! 3622: %
! 3623: \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
! 3624: \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
! 3625: \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
! 3626: \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
! 3627: \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
! 3628: \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
! 3629: \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
! 3630: \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
! 3631: %
! 3632: % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
! 3633: % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
! 3634: % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
! 3635: % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
! 3636: %
! 3637: % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
! 3638: % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
! 3639: % the same EC font.
! 3640: \def\ogonek#1{{%
! 3641: \def\temp{#1}%
! 3642: \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
! 3643: \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
! 3644: \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
! 3645: \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
! 3646: \else
! 3647: \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
! 3648: \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
! 3649: \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
! 3650: \fi
! 3651: \fi\fi\fi\fi
! 3652: }%
! 3653: }
! 3654: \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
! 3655: \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
! 3656: \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
! 3657: \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
! 3658: %
! 3659: % Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format)
! 3660: % for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text
! 3661: % companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec
! 3662: % package and follow the same conventions.
! 3663: %
! 3664: \def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}}
! 3665: \def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}}
! 3666: %
! 3667: \def\etcfont#1{%
! 3668: % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
! 3669: % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
! 3670: % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
! 3671: % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
! 3672: \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
! 3673: \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
! 3674: \ifmonospace
! 3675: % typewriter:
! 3676: \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
! 3677: \else
! 3678: \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
! 3679: % bold:
! 3680: \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
! 3681: \else
! 3682: % regular:
! 3683: \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
! 3684: \fi
! 3685: \fi
! 3686: \thisecfont
! 3687: }
! 3688:
! 3689: % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
! 3690: % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
! 3691: % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
! 3692: %
! 3693: \def\registeredsymbol{%
! 3694: $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}%
! 3695: \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
! 3696: }$%
! 3697: }
! 3698:
! 3699: % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
! 3700: %
! 3701: \def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
! 3702:
! 3703: % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
! 3704: % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
! 3705: % so we'll define it if necessary.
! 3706: %
! 3707: \ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
! 3708: \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
! 3709: \fi
! 3710:
! 3711: % Quotes.
! 3712: \chardef\quoteleft=`\`
! 3713: \chardef\quoteright=`\'
! 3714:
! 3715: % only change font for tt for correct kerning and to avoid using
! 3716: % \ecfont unless necessary.
! 3717: \def\quotedblleft{%
! 3718: \ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"10}\else{\char"5C}\fi
! 3719: }
! 3720:
! 3721: \def\quotedblright{%
! 3722: \ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"11}\else{\char`\"}\fi
! 3723: }
! 3724:
! 3725:
! 3726: \message{page headings,}
! 3727:
! 3728: \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
! 3729: \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
! 3730:
! 3731: % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
! 3732: \newif\ifseenauthor
! 3733: \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
! 3734:
! 3735: % @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or
! 3736: % @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete.
! 3737: \def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{%
! 3738: \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo
! 3739: command; move your @contents command if you want the contents
! 3740: after the title page.}}%
! 3741: \def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{%
! 3742: \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo
! 3743: command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you
! 3744: want the contents after the title page.}}%
! 3745:
! 3746: \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
! 3747: \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
! 3748: \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
! 3749:
! 3750: \envdef\titlepage{%
! 3751: % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
! 3752: \begingroup
! 3753: \parindent=0pt \textfonts
! 3754: % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
! 3755: \vglue\titlepagetopglue
! 3756: % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
! 3757: \finishedtitlepagetrue
! 3758: %
! 3759: % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
! 3760: % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
! 3761: \let\oldpage = \page
! 3762: \def\page{%
! 3763: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
! 3764: \finishtitlepage
! 3765: \fi
! 3766: \let\page = \oldpage
! 3767: \page
! 3768: \null
! 3769: }%
! 3770: }
! 3771:
! 3772: \def\Etitlepage{%
! 3773: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
! 3774: \finishtitlepage
! 3775: \fi
! 3776: % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
! 3777: % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
! 3778: % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
! 3779: % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
! 3780: \oldpage
! 3781: \endgroup
! 3782: %
! 3783: % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
! 3784: % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
! 3785: \HEADINGSon
! 3786: }
! 3787:
! 3788: \def\finishtitlepage{%
! 3789: \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
! 3790: \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
! 3791: \finishedtitlepagetrue
! 3792: }
! 3793:
! 3794: % Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
! 3795: % don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used
! 3796: % inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should
! 3797: % be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
! 3798: %
! 3799: \def\raggedtitlesettings{%
! 3800: \rm
! 3801: \hyphenpenalty=10000
! 3802: \parindent=0pt
! 3803: \tolerance=5000
! 3804: \ptexraggedright
! 3805: }
! 3806:
! 3807: % Macros to be used within @titlepage:
! 3808:
! 3809: \let\subtitlerm=\rmfont
! 3810: \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
! 3811:
! 3812: \parseargdef\title{%
! 3813: \checkenv\titlepage
! 3814: \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
! 3815: % print a rule at the page bottom also.
! 3816: \finishedtitlepagefalse
! 3817: \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
! 3818: }
! 3819:
! 3820: \parseargdef\subtitle{%
! 3821: \checkenv\titlepage
! 3822: {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
! 3823: }
! 3824:
! 3825: % @author should come last, but may come many times.
! 3826: % It can also be used inside @quotation.
! 3827: %
! 3828: \parseargdef\author{%
! 3829: \def\temp{\quotation}%
! 3830: \ifx\thisenv\temp
! 3831: \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
! 3832: \else
! 3833: \checkenv\titlepage
! 3834: \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
! 3835: {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}%
! 3836: \fi
! 3837: }
! 3838:
! 3839:
! 3840: % Set up page headings and footings.
! 3841:
! 3842: \let\thispage=\folio
! 3843:
! 3844: \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
! 3845: \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
! 3846: \newtoks\evenchapheadline% headline on even pages with a new chapter
! 3847: \newtoks\oddchapheadline % headline on odd pages with a new chapter
! 3848: \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
! 3849: \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
! 3850:
! 3851: % Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables
! 3852: \headline={{\textfonts\rm
! 3853: \ifchapterpage
! 3854: \ifodd\pageno\the\oddchapheadline\else\the\evenchapheadline\fi
! 3855: \else
! 3856: \ifodd\pageno\the\oddheadline\else\the\evenheadline\fi
! 3857: \fi}}
! 3858:
! 3859: \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
! 3860: \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
! 3861: \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
! 3862:
! 3863: % Commands to set those variables.
! 3864: % For example, this is what @headings on does
! 3865: % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
! 3866: % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
! 3867: % @evenfooting @thisfile||
! 3868: % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
! 3869:
! 3870:
! 3871: \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
! 3872: \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
! 3873: \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
! 3874: \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}
! 3875: \global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline}
! 3876:
! 3877: \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
! 3878: \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
! 3879: \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
! 3880: \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
! 3881: \global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline}
! 3882:
! 3883: \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
! 3884:
! 3885: \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
! 3886: \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
! 3887: \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
! 3888: \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
! 3889:
! 3890: \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
! 3891: \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
! 3892: \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
! 3893: \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
! 3894: %
! 3895: % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
! 3896: % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
! 3897: \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt
! 3898: \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
! 3899: }
! 3900:
! 3901: \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
! 3902:
! 3903: % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
! 3904: % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
! 3905: %
! 3906: % The same set of arguments for:
! 3907: %
! 3908: % @oddheadingmarks
! 3909: % @evenfootingmarks
! 3910: % @oddfootingmarks
! 3911: % @everyheadingmarks
! 3912: % @everyfootingmarks
! 3913:
! 3914: % These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks,
! 3915: % \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of
! 3916: % \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks.
! 3917: %
! 3918: \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
! 3919: \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
! 3920: \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
! 3921: \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
! 3922: \parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
! 3923: \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
! 3924: \parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
! 3925: \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
! 3926: % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
! 3927: \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
! 3928: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
! 3929: \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
! 3930: }
! 3931:
! 3932: \everyheadingmarks bottom
! 3933: \everyfootingmarks bottom
! 3934:
! 3935: % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
! 3936: % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
! 3937: % @headings off turns them off.
! 3938: % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
! 3939: % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
! 3940: % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
! 3941: % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
! 3942: % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
! 3943: % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
! 3944:
! 3945: \parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
! 3946:
! 3947: \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
! 3948: \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}\evenchapheadline={\hfil}%
! 3949: \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}\oddchapheadline={\hfil}%
! 3950: }
! 3951:
! 3952: \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
! 3953: \HEADINGSoff % it's the default
! 3954:
! 3955: % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
! 3956: \def\pageone{
! 3957: \global\pageno=1
! 3958: \global\arabiccount = \pagecount
! 3959: }
! 3960:
! 3961: % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
! 3962: % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
! 3963: % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
! 3964: % edge of all pages.
! 3965: \def\HEADINGSdouble{%
! 3966: \pageone
! 3967: \HEADINGSdoublex
! 3968: }
! 3969: \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 3970:
! 3971: % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
! 3972: % page number on top right.
! 3973: \def\HEADINGSsingle{%
! 3974: \pageone
! 3975: \HEADINGSsinglex
! 3976: }
! 3977: \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
! 3978:
! 3979: \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
! 3980: \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
! 3981: \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
! 3982: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 3983: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 3984: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
! 3985: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3986: \global\evenchapheadline={\line{\folio\hfil}}
! 3987: \global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
! 3988: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
! 3989: }
! 3990:
! 3991: \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
! 3992: \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
! 3993: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 3994: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 3995: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3996: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 3997: \global\evenchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
! 3998: \global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
! 3999: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 4000: }
! 4001:
! 4002: % for @setchapternewpage off
! 4003: \def\HEADINGSsinglechapoff{%
! 4004: \pageone
! 4005: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 4006: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 4007: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 4008: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 4009: \global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline
! 4010: \global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline
! 4011: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 4012: }
! 4013:
! 4014: % Subroutines used in generating headings
! 4015: % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
! 4016: % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
! 4017: % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
! 4018: \ifx\today\thisisundefined
! 4019: \def\today{%
! 4020: \number\day\space
! 4021: \ifcase\month
! 4022: \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
! 4023: \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
! 4024: \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
! 4025: \fi
! 4026: \space\number\year}
! 4027: \fi
! 4028:
! 4029: % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
! 4030: % It generates no output of its own.
! 4031: \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
! 4032: \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
! 4033:
! 4034:
! 4035: \message{tables,}
! 4036: % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
! 4037:
! 4038: % default indentation of table text
! 4039: \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
! 4040: % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
! 4041: \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
! 4042: % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
! 4043: \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
! 4044:
! 4045: % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
! 4046: \newdimen\itemmax
! 4047:
! 4048: % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
! 4049: % these defs.
! 4050: % They also define \itemindex
! 4051: % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
! 4052:
! 4053: \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
! 4054:
! 4055: \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
! 4056:
! 4057: \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
! 4058: \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
! 4059:
! 4060: \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
! 4061: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
! 4062: \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
! 4063: \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
! 4064: \itemindex{#1}%
! 4065: \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
! 4066: %
! 4067: % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
! 4068: % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
! 4069: % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
! 4070: % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
! 4071: % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
! 4072: \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
! 4073: %
! 4074: % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
! 4075: % but leave it ragged-right.
! 4076: \begingroup
! 4077: \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
! 4078: \advance\hsize by\tableindent
! 4079: \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
! 4080: \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
! 4081: \endgroup
! 4082: %
! 4083: % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
! 4084: % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
! 4085: \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
! 4086: %
! 4087: % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
! 4088: % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
! 4089: % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
! 4090: % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
! 4091: % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
! 4092: % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
! 4093: %
! 4094: \penalty 10001
! 4095: \endgroup
! 4096: \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
! 4097: \else
! 4098: % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
! 4099: % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
! 4100: \noindent
! 4101: % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
! 4102: % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
! 4103: % eventually be printed.
! 4104: \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
! 4105: \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
! 4106: \unhbox0
! 4107: \nobreak\kern\dimen0
! 4108: \endgroup
! 4109: \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
! 4110: \fi
! 4111: }
! 4112:
! 4113: \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
! 4114: \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
! 4115:
! 4116: % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
! 4117: \envdef\table{%
! 4118: \let\itemindex\gobble
! 4119: \tablecheck{table}%
! 4120: }
! 4121: \envdef\ftable{%
! 4122: \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
! 4123: \tablecheck{ftable}%
! 4124: }
! 4125: \envdef\vtable{%
! 4126: \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
! 4127: \tablecheck{vtable}%
! 4128: }
! 4129: \def\tablecheck#1{%
! 4130: \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
! 4131: \endgroup
! 4132: \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
! 4133: that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
! 4134: \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
! 4135: \else
! 4136: \let\next\tablex
! 4137: \fi
! 4138: \next
! 4139: }
! 4140: \def\tablex#1{%
! 4141: \def\itemindicate{#1}%
! 4142: \parsearg\tabley
! 4143: }
! 4144: \def\tabley#1{%
! 4145: {%
! 4146: \makevalueexpandable
! 4147: \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
! 4148: \expandafter
! 4149: }\temp \endtablez
! 4150: }
! 4151: \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
! 4152: \aboveenvbreak
! 4153: \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
! 4154: \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
! 4155: \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
! 4156: \itemmax=\tableindent
! 4157: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
! 4158: \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
! 4159: \exdentamount=\tableindent
! 4160: \parindent = 0pt
! 4161: \parskip = \smallskipamount
! 4162: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
! 4163: \let\item = \internalBitem
! 4164: \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
! 4165: }
! 4166: \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
! 4167: \let\Eftable\Etable
! 4168: \let\Evtable\Etable
! 4169: \let\Eitemize\Etable
! 4170: \let\Eenumerate\Etable
! 4171:
! 4172: % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
! 4173:
! 4174: \newcount \itemno
! 4175:
! 4176: \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
! 4177:
! 4178: \def\doitemize#1{%
! 4179: \aboveenvbreak
! 4180: \itemmax=\itemindent
! 4181: \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
! 4182: \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
! 4183: \exdentamount=\itemindent
! 4184: \parindent=0pt
! 4185: \parskip=\smallskipamount
! 4186: \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
! 4187: %
! 4188: % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says
! 4189: % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
! 4190: % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
! 4191: % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
! 4192: % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
! 4193: \def\itemcontents{#1}%
! 4194: \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
! 4195: %
! 4196: % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
! 4197: \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
! 4198: %
! 4199: \let\item=\itemizeitem
! 4200: }
! 4201:
! 4202: % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
! 4203: %
! 4204: \def\itemizeitem{%
! 4205: \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
! 4206: {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
! 4207: {%
! 4208: % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
! 4209: % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
! 4210: % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
! 4211: % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
! 4212: % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
! 4213: % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
! 4214: % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
! 4215: % that's the theory.
! 4216: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
! 4217: \noindent
! 4218: \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
! 4219: %
! 4220: \ifinner\else
! 4221: \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item.
! 4222: \fi
! 4223: % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an
! 4224: % @itemize looks awful there.
! 4225: }%
! 4226: \flushcr
! 4227: }
! 4228:
! 4229: % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
! 4230: % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
! 4231: %
! 4232: \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
! 4233:
! 4234: % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
! 4235: % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
! 4236: % argument is the same as `1'.
! 4237: %
! 4238: \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
! 4239: \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
! 4240: % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
! 4241: \def\thearg{#1}%
! 4242: \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
! 4243: %
! 4244: % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
! 4245: % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
! 4246: % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
! 4247: % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
! 4248: % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
! 4249: \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
! 4250: \ifx\rest\empty
! 4251: % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
! 4252: % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
! 4253: % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
! 4254: % not equal to itself.
! 4255: % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
! 4256: %
! 4257: % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
! 4258: % continuing to look for a <number>.
! 4259: %
! 4260: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
! 4261: \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
! 4262: \else
! 4263: % It's a letter.
! 4264: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
! 4265: \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
! 4266: \else
! 4267: \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
! 4268: \fi
! 4269: \fi
! 4270: \else
! 4271: % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
! 4272: \numericenumerate
! 4273: \fi
! 4274: }
! 4275:
! 4276: % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
! 4277: % given in \thearg.
! 4278: %
! 4279: \def\numericenumerate{%
! 4280: \itemno = \thearg
! 4281: \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
! 4282: }
! 4283:
! 4284: % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
! 4285: \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
! 4286: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
! 4287: \startenumeration{%
! 4288: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
! 4289: \ifnum\itemno=0
! 4290: \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
! 4291: alphabet}%
! 4292: \fi
! 4293: \char\lccode\itemno
! 4294: }%
! 4295: }
! 4296:
! 4297: % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
! 4298: \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
! 4299: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
! 4300: \startenumeration{%
! 4301: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
! 4302: \ifnum\itemno=0
! 4303: \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
! 4304: alphabet}
! 4305: \fi
! 4306: \char\uccode\itemno
! 4307: }%
! 4308: }
! 4309:
! 4310: % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
! 4311: % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
! 4312: % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
! 4313: %
! 4314: \def\startenumeration#1{%
! 4315: \advance\itemno by -1
! 4316: \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
! 4317: }
! 4318:
! 4319: % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
! 4320: % to @enumerate.
! 4321: %
! 4322: \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
! 4323: \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
! 4324: \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
! 4325: \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
! 4326:
! 4327:
! 4328: % @multitable macros
! 4329: % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
! 4330: %
! 4331: % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
! 4332: % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
! 4333: % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
! 4334: % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
! 4335:
! 4336: % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
! 4337:
! 4338: % To make preamble:
! 4339: %
! 4340: % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
! 4341: % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
! 4342: % @item ...
! 4343: %
! 4344: % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
! 4345: % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
! 4346: % columns as desired.
! 4347:
! 4348:
! 4349: % Or use a template:
! 4350: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
! 4351: % @item ...
! 4352: % using the widest term desired in each column.
! 4353:
! 4354: % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
! 4355: % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
! 4356: % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
! 4357: % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
! 4358:
! 4359: % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
! 4360: % if they are.
! 4361:
! 4362: % Sample multitable:
! 4363:
! 4364: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
! 4365: % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
! 4366: % @item
! 4367: % first col stuff
! 4368: % @tab
! 4369: % second col stuff
! 4370: % @tab
! 4371: % third col
! 4372: % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
! 4373: % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
! 4374: %
! 4375: % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
! 4376: % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
! 4377: % @end multitable
! 4378:
! 4379: % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
! 4380: % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
! 4381: % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
! 4382: % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
! 4383: % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
! 4384: % to baseline.
! 4385: % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
! 4386: %
! 4387: \newskip\multitableparskip
! 4388: \newskip\multitableparindent
! 4389: \newdimen\multitablecolspace
! 4390: \newskip\multitablelinespace
! 4391: \multitableparskip=0pt
! 4392: \multitableparindent=6pt
! 4393: \multitablecolspace=12pt
! 4394: \multitablelinespace=0pt
! 4395:
! 4396: % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
! 4397: %
! 4398: \let\endsetuptable\relax
! 4399: \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
! 4400: \let\columnfractions\relax
! 4401: \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
! 4402: \newif\ifsetpercent
! 4403:
! 4404: % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
! 4405: % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
! 4406: %
! 4407: \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
! 4408: \global\advance\colcount by 1
! 4409: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
! 4410: \setuptable
! 4411: }
! 4412:
! 4413: \newcount\colcount
! 4414: \def\setuptable#1{%
! 4415: \def\firstarg{#1}%
! 4416: \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
! 4417: \let\go = \relax
! 4418: \else
! 4419: \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
! 4420: \global\setpercenttrue
! 4421: \else
! 4422: \ifsetpercent
! 4423: \let\go\pickupwholefraction
! 4424: \else
! 4425: \global\advance\colcount by 1
! 4426: \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
! 4427: % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
! 4428: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
! 4429: \fi
! 4430: \fi
! 4431: \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
! 4432: % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
! 4433: % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
! 4434: \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
! 4435: \else
! 4436: \let\go = \setuptable
! 4437: \fi%
! 4438: \fi
! 4439: \go
! 4440: }
! 4441:
! 4442: % multitable-only commands.
! 4443: %
! 4444: % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments
! 4445: % have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an
! 4446: % alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to
! 4447: % undo it ourselves.
! 4448: \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
! 4449: \def\headitem{%
! 4450: \checkenv\multitable
! 4451: \crcr
! 4452: \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings
! 4453: \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
! 4454: \the\everytab % for the first item
! 4455: }%
! 4456: %
! 4457: % default for tables with no headings.
! 4458: \let\headitemcrhook=\relax
! 4459: %
! 4460: % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
! 4461: % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
! 4462: % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
! 4463: % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
! 4464: \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
! 4465:
! 4466: % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
! 4467: %
! 4468: \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
! 4469: %
! 4470: \envdef\multitable{%
! 4471: \vskip\parskip
! 4472: \startsavinginserts
! 4473: %
! 4474: % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
! 4475: % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
! 4476: % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
! 4477: % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
! 4478: \def\item{\crcr}%
! 4479: %
! 4480: \tolerance=9500
! 4481: \hbadness=9500
! 4482: \setmultitablespacing
! 4483: \parskip=\multitableparskip
! 4484: \parindent=\multitableparindent
! 4485: \overfullrule=0pt
! 4486: \global\colcount=0
! 4487: %
! 4488: \everycr = {%
! 4489: \noalign{%
! 4490: \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem.
! 4491: \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
! 4492: %
! 4493: % Check for saved footnotes, etc.:
! 4494: \checkinserts
! 4495: %
! 4496: % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset:
! 4497: \headitemcrhook
! 4498: \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
! 4499: }%
! 4500: }%
! 4501: %
! 4502: \parsearg\domultitable
! 4503: }
! 4504: \def\domultitable#1{%
! 4505: % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
! 4506: \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
! 4507: %
! 4508: % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
! 4509: % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
! 4510: % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
! 4511: % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
! 4512: \halign\bgroup &%
! 4513: \global\advance\colcount by 1
! 4514: \multistrut
! 4515: \vtop{%
! 4516: % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
! 4517: \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
! 4518: %
! 4519: % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
! 4520: % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
! 4521: % the first one.
! 4522: %
! 4523: % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
! 4524: % to the width of each template entry.
! 4525: %
! 4526: % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
! 4527: % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
! 4528: % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
! 4529: % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
! 4530: %
! 4531: % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
! 4532: \rightskip=0pt
! 4533: \ifnum\colcount=1
! 4534: % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
! 4535: \advance\hsize by\leftskip
! 4536: \else
! 4537: \ifsetpercent \else
! 4538: % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
! 4539: % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
! 4540: \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
! 4541: \fi
! 4542: % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
! 4543: \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
! 4544: \fi
! 4545: % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
! 4546: % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
! 4547: % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
! 4548: % For example:
! 4549: % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
! 4550: % @item @code{#}
! 4551: % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
! 4552: % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
! 4553: % marking characters.
! 4554: \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
! 4555: }\cr
! 4556: }
! 4557: \def\Emultitable{%
! 4558: \crcr
! 4559: \egroup % end the \halign
! 4560: \global\setpercentfalse
! 4561: }
! 4562:
! 4563: \def\setmultitablespacing{%
! 4564: \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
! 4565: %
! 4566: % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
! 4567: % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
! 4568: % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
! 4569: % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
! 4570: \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
! 4571: \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
! 4572: \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
! 4573: \fi
! 4574: % Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
! 4575: % table. If not, do nothing.
! 4576: % If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
! 4577: \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
! 4578: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
! 4579: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
! 4580: % than skip between lines in the table.
! 4581: \fi%
! 4582: \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
! 4583: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
! 4584: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
! 4585: % than skip between lines in the table.
! 4586: \fi}
! 4587:
! 4588:
! 4589: \message{conditionals,}
! 4590:
! 4591: % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
! 4592: % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
! 4593: % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
! 4594: % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
! 4595: % attempt to close an environment group.
! 4596: %
! 4597: \def\makecond#1{%
! 4598: \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
! 4599: \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
! 4600: }
! 4601: \makecond{iftex}
! 4602: \makecond{ifnotdocbook}
! 4603: \makecond{ifnothtml}
! 4604: \makecond{ifnotinfo}
! 4605: \makecond{ifnotplaintext}
! 4606: \makecond{ifnotxml}
! 4607:
! 4608: % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
! 4609: %
! 4610: \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
! 4611: \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
! 4612: \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
! 4613: \def\html{\doignore{html}}
! 4614: \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
! 4615: \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
! 4616: \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
! 4617: \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
! 4618: \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
! 4619: \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
! 4620: \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
! 4621: \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
! 4622: \def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
! 4623:
! 4624: % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
! 4625: %
! 4626: % A count to remember the depth of nesting.
! 4627: \newcount\doignorecount
! 4628:
! 4629: \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
! 4630: % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
! 4631: \obeylines
! 4632: \catcode`\@ = \other
! 4633: \catcode`\{ = \other
! 4634: \catcode`\} = \other
! 4635: %
! 4636: % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
! 4637: \spaceisspace
! 4638: %
! 4639: % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
! 4640: \doignorecount = 0
! 4641: %
! 4642: % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
! 4643: \dodoignore{#1}%
! 4644: }
! 4645:
! 4646: { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
! 4647: \obeylines %
! 4648: %
! 4649: \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
! 4650: % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
! 4651: %
! 4652: % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
! 4653: \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
! 4654: \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
! 4655: %
! 4656: % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
! 4657: % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
! 4658: % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
! 4659: \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
! 4660: %
! 4661: % And now expand that command.
! 4662: \doignoretext ^^M%
! 4663: }%
! 4664: }
! 4665:
! 4666: \def\doignoreyyy#1{%
! 4667: \def\temp{#1}%
! 4668: \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
! 4669: \let\next\doignoretextzzz
! 4670: \else % Found a nested condition, ...
! 4671: \advance\doignorecount by 1
! 4672: \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
! 4673: % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
! 4674: \fi
! 4675: \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
! 4676: }
! 4677:
! 4678: % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
! 4679: %
! 4680: \def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
! 4681: \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
! 4682: \let\next\enddoignore
! 4683: \else % Still inside a nested condition.
! 4684: \advance\doignorecount by -1
! 4685: \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
! 4686: \fi
! 4687: \next
! 4688: }
! 4689:
! 4690: % Finish off ignored text.
! 4691: { \obeylines%
! 4692: % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
! 4693: % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
! 4694: % would result in a blank line in the output.
! 4695: \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
! 4696: }
! 4697:
! 4698:
! 4699: % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
! 4700: % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
! 4701: %
! 4702: % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
! 4703: % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
! 4704: % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
! 4705: % didn't need it.
! 4706: % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
! 4707: %
! 4708: \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
! 4709: \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
! 4710: {%
! 4711: \makevalueexpandable
! 4712: \def\temp{#2}%
! 4713: \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
! 4714: \ifx\temp\empty
! 4715: \next{}%
! 4716: \else
! 4717: \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
! 4718: \fi
! 4719: }%
! 4720: }
! 4721: % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
! 4722: \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
! 4723:
! 4724: % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
! 4725: %
! 4726: \parseargdef\clear{%
! 4727: {%
! 4728: \makevalueexpandable
! 4729: \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
! 4730: }%
! 4731: }
! 4732:
! 4733: % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
! 4734: \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
! 4735: \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
! 4736: {
! 4737: \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
! 4738: %
! 4739: \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
! 4740: \let\value = \expandablevalue
! 4741: % We don't want these characters active, ...
! 4742: \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
! 4743: % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
! 4744: % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
! 4745: % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
! 4746: \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
! 4747: }
! 4748: }
! 4749:
! 4750: \def\expandablevalue#1{%
! 4751: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
! 4752: {[No value for ``#1'']}%
! 4753: \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
! 4754: \else
! 4755: \csname SET#1\endcsname
! 4756: \fi
! 4757: }
! 4758:
! 4759: % Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the
! 4760: % definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when
! 4761: % writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does.
! 4762: % If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it
! 4763: % will be set by the time it is read back in.
! 4764: %
! 4765: % NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here.
! 4766: \def\dummyvalue#1{%
! 4767: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
! 4768: \string\value{#1}%
! 4769: \else
! 4770: \csname SET#1\endcsname
! 4771: \fi
! 4772: }
! 4773:
! 4774: % Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value
! 4775: % if possible, otherwise sort late.
! 4776: \def\indexnofontsvalue#1{%
! 4777: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
! 4778: ZZZZZZZ%
! 4779: \else
! 4780: \csname SET#1\endcsname
! 4781: \fi
! 4782: }
! 4783:
! 4784: % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
! 4785: % with @set.
! 4786: %
! 4787: % To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call
! 4788: % \makecond and then redefine.
! 4789: %
! 4790: \makecond{ifset}
! 4791: \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
! 4792: \def\doifset#1#2{%
! 4793: {%
! 4794: \makevalueexpandable
! 4795: \let\next=\empty
! 4796: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
! 4797: #1% If not set, redefine \next.
! 4798: \fi
! 4799: \expandafter
! 4800: }\next
! 4801: }
! 4802: \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
! 4803:
! 4804: % @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
! 4805: % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
! 4806: %
! 4807: % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
! 4808: % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
! 4809: % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
! 4810: %
! 4811: \makecond{ifclear}
! 4812: \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
! 4813: \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
! 4814:
! 4815: % @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
! 4816: % without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the
! 4817: % TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
! 4818: % defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
! 4819: %
! 4820: \makecond{ifcommanddefined}
! 4821: \def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
! 4822: %
! 4823: \def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
! 4824: \makevalueexpandable
! 4825: \let\next=\empty
! 4826: \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
! 4827: #1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
! 4828: \fi
! 4829: \expandafter
! 4830: }\next
! 4831: }
! 4832: \def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
! 4833:
! 4834: % @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
! 4835: \makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
! 4836: \def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
! 4837: \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
! 4838: \def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
! 4839:
! 4840: % Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
! 4841: % test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
! 4842: \set txicommandconditionals
! 4843:
! 4844: % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
! 4845: % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
! 4846: \let\dircategory=\comment
! 4847:
! 4848: % @defininfoenclose.
! 4849: \let\definfoenclose=\comment
! 4850:
! 4851:
! 4852: \message{indexing,}
! 4853: % Index generation facilities
! 4854:
! 4855: % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
! 4856: % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
! 4857: \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
! 4858:
! 4859: % \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX.
! 4860: % It automatically defines \IXindex such that
! 4861: % \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX.
! 4862: % It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for
! 4863: % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX.
! 4864: % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
! 4865: % for the sake of vms.
! 4866: %
! 4867: \def\newindex#1{%
! 4868: \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
! 4869: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
! 4870: \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
! 4871: }
! 4872:
! 4873: % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
! 4874: %
! 4875: \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
! 4876:
! 4877: % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
! 4878: %
! 4879: \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
! 4880: %
! 4881: \def\newcodeindex#1{%
! 4882: \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
! 4883: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
! 4884: \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
! 4885: }
! 4886:
! 4887: % The default indices:
! 4888: \newindex{cp}% concepts,
! 4889: \newcodeindex{fn}% functions,
! 4890: \newcodeindex{vr}% variables,
! 4891: \newcodeindex{tp}% types,
! 4892: \newcodeindex{ky}% keys
! 4893: \newcodeindex{pg}% and programs.
! 4894:
! 4895:
! 4896: % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
! 4897: % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
! 4898: %
! 4899: % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
! 4900: % inside @code.
! 4901: %
! 4902: \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
! 4903: \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
! 4904:
! 4905: % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
! 4906: % #3 the target index (bar).
! 4907: \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
! 4908: \requireopenindexfile{#3}%
! 4909: % redefine \fooindfile:
! 4910: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
! 4911: \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
! 4912: % redefine \fooindex:
! 4913: \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
! 4914: }
! 4915:
! 4916: % Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros.
! 4917: % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
! 4918: % and it is the two-letter name of the index.
! 4919:
! 4920: \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx}
! 4921: \def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
! 4922:
! 4923: % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
! 4924: \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx}
! 4925: \def\docodeindexxxx #1{\docind{\indexname}{#1}}
! 4926:
! 4927:
! 4928: % Used for the aux, toc and index files to prevent expansion of Texinfo
! 4929: % commands.
! 4930: %
! 4931: \def\atdummies{%
! 4932: \definedummyletter\@%
! 4933: \definedummyletter\ %
! 4934: \definedummyletter\{%
! 4935: \definedummyletter\}%
! 4936: \definedummyletter\&%
! 4937: %
! 4938: % Do the redefinitions.
! 4939: \definedummies
! 4940: \otherbackslash
! 4941: }
! 4942:
! 4943: % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
! 4944: % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words,
! 4945: % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
! 4946: % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
! 4947: % from whatever follows.
! 4948: %
! 4949: % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
! 4950: % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
! 4951: % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
! 4952: %
! 4953: % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
! 4954: % space.
! 4955: %
! 4956: \def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}%
! 4957: \def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}%
! 4958: \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
! 4959:
! 4960: % Called from \atdummies to prevent the expansion of commands.
! 4961: %
! 4962: \def\definedummies{%
! 4963: %
! 4964: \let\commondummyword\definedummyword
! 4965: \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter
! 4966: \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent
! 4967: \commondummiesnofonts
! 4968: %
! 4969: \definedummyletter\_%
! 4970: \definedummyletter\-%
! 4971: %
! 4972: % Non-English letters.
! 4973: \definedummyword\AA
! 4974: \definedummyword\AE
! 4975: \definedummyword\DH
! 4976: \definedummyword\L
! 4977: \definedummyword\O
! 4978: \definedummyword\OE
! 4979: \definedummyword\TH
! 4980: \definedummyword\aa
! 4981: \definedummyword\ae
! 4982: \definedummyword\dh
! 4983: \definedummyword\exclamdown
! 4984: \definedummyword\l
! 4985: \definedummyword\o
! 4986: \definedummyword\oe
! 4987: \definedummyword\ordf
! 4988: \definedummyword\ordm
! 4989: \definedummyword\questiondown
! 4990: \definedummyword\ss
! 4991: \definedummyword\th
! 4992: %
! 4993: % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
! 4994: \definedummyword\bf
! 4995: \definedummyword\gtr
! 4996: \definedummyword\hat
! 4997: \definedummyword\less
! 4998: \definedummyword\sf
! 4999: \definedummyword\sl
! 5000: \definedummyword\tclose
! 5001: \definedummyword\tt
! 5002: %
! 5003: \definedummyword\LaTeX
! 5004: \definedummyword\TeX
! 5005: %
! 5006: % Assorted special characters.
! 5007: \definedummyword\ampchar
! 5008: \definedummyword\atchar
! 5009: \definedummyword\arrow
! 5010: \definedummyword\backslashchar
! 5011: \definedummyword\bullet
! 5012: \definedummyword\comma
! 5013: \definedummyword\copyright
! 5014: \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
! 5015: \definedummyword\dots
! 5016: \definedummyword\enddots
! 5017: \definedummyword\entrybreak
! 5018: \definedummyword\equiv
! 5019: \definedummyword\error
! 5020: \definedummyword\euro
! 5021: \definedummyword\expansion
! 5022: \definedummyword\geq
! 5023: \definedummyword\guillemetleft
! 5024: \definedummyword\guillemetright
! 5025: \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
! 5026: \definedummyword\guilsinglright
! 5027: \definedummyword\lbracechar
! 5028: \definedummyword\leq
! 5029: \definedummyword\mathopsup
! 5030: \definedummyword\minus
! 5031: \definedummyword\ogonek
! 5032: \definedummyword\pounds
! 5033: \definedummyword\point
! 5034: \definedummyword\print
! 5035: \definedummyword\quotedblbase
! 5036: \definedummyword\quotedblleft
! 5037: \definedummyword\quotedblright
! 5038: \definedummyword\quoteleft
! 5039: \definedummyword\quoteright
! 5040: \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
! 5041: \definedummyword\rbracechar
! 5042: \definedummyword\result
! 5043: \definedummyword\sub
! 5044: \definedummyword\sup
! 5045: \definedummyword\textdegree
! 5046: %
! 5047: \definedummyword\subentry
! 5048: %
! 5049: % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
! 5050: \macrolist
! 5051: \let\value\dummyvalue
! 5052: %
! 5053: \normalturnoffactive
! 5054: }
! 5055:
! 5056: % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts.
! 5057: % Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before
! 5058: % using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters.
! 5059: %
! 5060: \def\commondummiesnofonts{%
! 5061: % Control letters and accents.
! 5062: \commondummyletter\!%
! 5063: \commondummyaccent\"%
! 5064: \commondummyaccent\'%
! 5065: \commondummyletter\*%
! 5066: \commondummyaccent\,%
! 5067: \commondummyletter\.%
! 5068: \commondummyletter\/%
! 5069: \commondummyletter\:%
! 5070: \commondummyaccent\=%
! 5071: \commondummyletter\?%
! 5072: \commondummyaccent\^%
! 5073: \commondummyaccent\`%
! 5074: \commondummyaccent\~%
! 5075: \commondummyword\u
! 5076: \commondummyword\v
! 5077: \commondummyword\H
! 5078: \commondummyword\dotaccent
! 5079: \commondummyword\ogonek
! 5080: \commondummyword\ringaccent
! 5081: \commondummyword\tieaccent
! 5082: \commondummyword\ubaraccent
! 5083: \commondummyword\udotaccent
! 5084: \commondummyword\dotless
! 5085: %
! 5086: % Texinfo font commands.
! 5087: \commondummyword\b
! 5088: \commondummyword\i
! 5089: \commondummyword\r
! 5090: \commondummyword\sansserif
! 5091: \commondummyword\sc
! 5092: \commondummyword\slanted
! 5093: \commondummyword\t
! 5094: %
! 5095: % Commands that take arguments.
! 5096: \commondummyword\abbr
! 5097: \commondummyword\acronym
! 5098: \commondummyword\anchor
! 5099: \commondummyword\cite
! 5100: \commondummyword\code
! 5101: \commondummyword\command
! 5102: \commondummyword\dfn
! 5103: \commondummyword\dmn
! 5104: \commondummyword\email
! 5105: \commondummyword\emph
! 5106: \commondummyword\env
! 5107: \commondummyword\file
! 5108: \commondummyword\image
! 5109: \commondummyword\indicateurl
! 5110: \commondummyword\inforef
! 5111: \commondummyword\kbd
! 5112: \commondummyword\key
! 5113: \commondummyword\math
! 5114: \commondummyword\option
! 5115: \commondummyword\pxref
! 5116: \commondummyword\ref
! 5117: \commondummyword\samp
! 5118: \commondummyword\strong
! 5119: \commondummyword\tie
! 5120: \commondummyword\U
! 5121: \commondummyword\uref
! 5122: \commondummyword\url
! 5123: \commondummyword\var
! 5124: \commondummyword\verb
! 5125: \commondummyword\w
! 5126: \commondummyword\xref
! 5127: }
! 5128:
! 5129: \let\indexlbrace\relax
! 5130: \let\indexrbrace\relax
! 5131: \let\indexatchar\relax
! 5132: \let\indexbackslash\relax
! 5133:
! 5134: {\catcode`\@=0
! 5135: \catcode`\\=13
! 5136: @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}}
! 5137: }
! 5138:
! 5139: {
! 5140: \catcode`\<=13
! 5141: \catcode`\-=13
! 5142: \catcode`\`=13
! 5143: \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{%
! 5144: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else
! 5145: % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term.
! 5146: % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.)
! 5147: \let`=\empty
! 5148: \fi
! 5149: %
! 5150: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else
! 5151: \backslashdisappear
! 5152: \fi
! 5153: %
! 5154: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else
! 5155: \def-{}%
! 5156: \fi
! 5157: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else
! 5158: \def<{}%
! 5159: \fi
! 5160: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else
! 5161: \def\@{}%
! 5162: \fi
! 5163: }
! 5164:
! 5165: \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{%
! 5166: \let-\normaldash
! 5167: \let<\normalless
! 5168: }
! 5169: }
! 5170:
! 5171:
! 5172: % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
! 5173: % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
! 5174: % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
! 5175: % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
! 5176: %
! 5177: \def\indexnofonts{%
! 5178: % Accent commands should become @asis.
! 5179: \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
! 5180: % We can just ignore other control letters.
! 5181: \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
! 5182: % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
! 5183: \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent
! 5184: \commondummiesnofonts
! 5185: %
! 5186: % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
! 5187: % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
! 5188: % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
! 5189: %\let\tt=\asis
! 5190: %
! 5191: \def\ { }%
! 5192: \def\@{@}%
! 5193: \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
! 5194: \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
! 5195: %
! 5196: \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}%
! 5197: \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}%
! 5198: \let\lbracechar\{%
! 5199: \let\rbracechar\}%
! 5200: %
! 5201: %
! 5202: \let\do\indexnofontsdef
! 5203: %
! 5204: % Non-English letters.
! 5205: \do\AA{AA}%
! 5206: \do\AE{AE}%
! 5207: \do\DH{DZZ}%
! 5208: \do\L{L}%
! 5209: \do\OE{OE}%
! 5210: \do\O{O}%
! 5211: \do\TH{TH}%
! 5212: \do\aa{aa}%
! 5213: \do\ae{ae}%
! 5214: \do\dh{dzz}%
! 5215: \do\exclamdown{!}%
! 5216: \do\l{l}%
! 5217: \do\oe{oe}%
! 5218: \do\ordf{a}%
! 5219: \do\ordm{o}%
! 5220: \do\o{o}%
! 5221: \do\questiondown{?}%
! 5222: \do\ss{ss}%
! 5223: \do\th{th}%
! 5224: %
! 5225: \do\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
! 5226: \do\TeX{TeX}%
! 5227: %
! 5228: % Assorted special characters.
! 5229: \do\atchar{@}%
! 5230: \do\arrow{->}%
! 5231: \do\bullet{bullet}%
! 5232: \do\comma{,}%
! 5233: \do\copyright{copyright}%
! 5234: \do\dots{...}%
! 5235: \do\enddots{...}%
! 5236: \do\equiv{==}%
! 5237: \do\error{error}%
! 5238: \do\euro{euro}%
! 5239: \do\expansion{==>}%
! 5240: \do\geq{>=}%
! 5241: \do\guillemetleft{<<}%
! 5242: \do\guillemetright{>>}%
! 5243: \do\guilsinglleft{<}%
! 5244: \do\guilsinglright{>}%
! 5245: \do\leq{<=}%
! 5246: \do\lbracechar{\{}%
! 5247: \do\minus{-}%
! 5248: \do\point{.}%
! 5249: \do\pounds{pounds}%
! 5250: \do\print{-|}%
! 5251: \do\quotedblbase{"}%
! 5252: \do\quotedblleft{"}%
! 5253: \do\quotedblright{"}%
! 5254: \do\quoteleft{`}%
! 5255: \do\quoteright{'}%
! 5256: \do\quotesinglbase{,}%
! 5257: \do\rbracechar{\}}%
! 5258: \do\registeredsymbol{R}%
! 5259: \do\result{=>}%
! 5260: \do\textdegree{o}%
! 5261: %
! 5262: % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
! 5263: % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
! 5264: % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
! 5265: % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
! 5266: % that starts with \.
! 5267: %
! 5268: % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
! 5269: % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
! 5270: % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
! 5271: %
! 5272: \macrolist
! 5273: \let\value\indexnofontsvalue
! 5274: }
! 5275:
! 5276: % Give the control sequence a definition that removes the {} that follows
! 5277: % its use, e.g. @AA{} -> AA
! 5278: \def\indexnofontsdef#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}}%
! 5279:
! 5280:
! 5281:
! 5282:
! 5283: % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
! 5284: \def\doind#1#2{%
! 5285: \iflinks
! 5286: {%
! 5287: %
! 5288: \requireopenindexfile{#1}%
! 5289: \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
! 5290: %
! 5291: \def\indextext{#2}%
! 5292: \safewhatsit\doindwrite
! 5293: }%
! 5294: \fi
! 5295: }
! 5296:
! 5297: % Same as \doind, but for code indices
! 5298: \def\docind#1#2{%
! 5299: \iflinks
! 5300: {%
! 5301: %
! 5302: \requireopenindexfile{#1}%
! 5303: \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
! 5304: %
! 5305: \def\indextext{#2}%
! 5306: \safewhatsit\docindwrite
! 5307: }%
! 5308: \fi
! 5309: }
! 5310:
! 5311: % Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it.
! 5312: \def\requireopenindexfile#1{%
! 5313: \ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0
! 5314: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
! 5315: \edef\suffix{#1}%
! 5316: % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output
! 5317: % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead.
! 5318: \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi
! 5319: % Open the file
! 5320: \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix
! 5321: % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current
! 5322: % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for
! 5323: % preceding skips.
! 5324: \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}%
! 5325: \fi}
! 5326: \def\indexisfl{fl}
! 5327:
! 5328: % Definition for writing index entry sort key.
! 5329: {
! 5330: \catcode`\-=13
! 5331: \gdef\indexwritesortas{%
! 5332: \begingroup
! 5333: \indexnonalnumreappear
! 5334: \indexwritesortasxxx}
! 5335: \gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{%
! 5336: \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup}
! 5337: }
! 5338:
! 5339: \def\indexwriteseealso#1{
! 5340: \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seealso{#1}}%
! 5341: }
! 5342: \def\indexwriteseeentry#1{
! 5343: \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seeentry{#1}}%
! 5344: }
! 5345:
! 5346: % The default definitions
! 5347: \def\sortas#1{}%
! 5348: \def\seealso#1{\i{\putwordSeeAlso}\ #1}% for sorted index file only
! 5349: \def\putwordSeeAlso{See also}
! 5350: \def\seeentry#1{\i{\putwordSee}\ #1}% for sorted index file only
! 5351:
! 5352:
! 5353: % Given index entry text like "aaa @subentry bbb @sortas{ZZZ}":
! 5354: % * Set \bracedtext to "{aaa}{bbb}"
! 5355: % * Set \fullindexsortkey to "aaa @subentry ZZZ"
! 5356: % * If @seealso occurs, set \pagenumbertext
! 5357: %
! 5358: \def\splitindexentry#1{%
! 5359: \gdef\fullindexsortkey{}%
! 5360: \xdef\bracedtext{}%
! 5361: \def\sep{}%
! 5362: \def\seealso##1{}%
! 5363: \def\seeentry##1{}%
! 5364: \expandafter\doindexsegment#1\subentry\finish\subentry
! 5365: }
! 5366:
! 5367: % append the results from the next segment
! 5368: \def\doindexsegment#1\subentry{%
! 5369: \def\segment{#1}%
! 5370: \ifx\segment\isfinish
! 5371: \else
! 5372: %
! 5373: % Fully expand the segment, throwing away any @sortas directives, and
! 5374: % trim spaces.
! 5375: \edef\trimmed{\segment}%
! 5376: \edef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}%
! 5377: \ifincodeindex
! 5378: \edef\trimmed{\noexpand\code{\trimmed}}%
! 5379: \fi
! 5380: %
! 5381: \xdef\bracedtext{\bracedtext{\trimmed}}%
! 5382: %
! 5383: % Get the string to sort by. Process the segment with all
! 5384: % font commands turned off.
! 5385: \bgroup
! 5386: \let\sortas\indexwritesortas
! 5387: \let\seealso\indexwriteseealso
! 5388: \let\seeentry\indexwriteseeentry
! 5389: \indexnofonts
! 5390: % The braces around the commands are recognized by texindex.
! 5391: \def\lbracechar{{\string\indexlbrace}}%
! 5392: \def\rbracechar{{\string\indexrbrace}}%
! 5393: \let\{=\lbracechar
! 5394: \let\}=\rbracechar
! 5395: \def\@{{\string\indexatchar}}%
! 5396: \def\atchar##1{\@}%
! 5397: \def\backslashchar{{\string\indexbackslash}}%
! 5398: \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\let~\backslashchar}%
! 5399: %
! 5400: \let\indexsortkey\empty
! 5401: \global\let\pagenumbertext\empty
! 5402: % Execute the segment and throw away the typeset output. This executes
! 5403: % any @sortas or @seealso commands in this segment.
! 5404: \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\segment}%
! 5405: \ifx\indexsortkey\empty{%
! 5406: \indexnonalnumdisappear
! 5407: \xdef\trimmed{\segment}%
! 5408: \xdef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}%
! 5409: \xdef\indexsortkey{\trimmed}%
! 5410: \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi
! 5411: }\fi
! 5412: %
! 5413: % Append to \fullindexsortkey.
! 5414: \edef\tmp{\gdef\noexpand\fullindexsortkey{%
! 5415: \fullindexsortkey\sep\indexsortkey}}%
! 5416: \tmp
! 5417: \egroup
! 5418: \def\sep{\subentry}%
! 5419: %
! 5420: \expandafter\doindexsegment
! 5421: \fi
! 5422: }
! 5423: \def\isfinish{\finish}%
! 5424: \newbox\dummybox % used above
! 5425:
! 5426: \let\subentry\relax
! 5427:
! 5428: % Use \ instead of @ in index files. To support old texi2dvi and texindex.
! 5429: % This works without changing the escape character used in the toc or aux
! 5430: % files because the index entries are fully expanded here, and \string uses
! 5431: % the current value of \escapechar.
! 5432: \def\escapeisbackslash{\escapechar=`\\}
! 5433:
! 5434: % Use \ in index files by default. texi2dvi didn't support @ as the escape
! 5435: % character (as it checked for "\entry" in the files, and not "@entry"). When
! 5436: % the new version of texi2dvi has had a chance to become more prevalent, then
! 5437: % the escape character can change back to @ again. This should be an easy
! 5438: % change to make now because both @ and \ are only used as escape characters in
! 5439: % index files, never standing for themselves.
! 5440: %
! 5441: \set txiindexescapeisbackslash
! 5442:
! 5443: % Write the entry in \indextext to the index file.
! 5444: %
! 5445:
! 5446: \newif\ifincodeindex
! 5447: \def\doindwrite{\incodeindexfalse\doindwritex}
! 5448: \def\docindwrite{\incodeindextrue\doindwritex}
! 5449:
! 5450: \def\doindwritex{%
! 5451: \maybemarginindex
! 5452: %
! 5453: \atdummies
! 5454: %
! 5455: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax\else
! 5456: \escapeisbackslash
! 5457: \fi
! 5458: %
! 5459: % For texindex which always views { and } as separators.
! 5460: \def\{{\lbracechar{}}%
! 5461: \def\}{\rbracechar{}}%
! 5462: \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\backslashchar{}}}%
! 5463: %
! 5464: % Split the entry into primary entry and any subentries, and get the index
! 5465: % sort key.
! 5466: \splitindexentry\indextext
! 5467: %
! 5468: % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
! 5469: % the original text, including any font commands. We write
! 5470: % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
! 5471: % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
! 5472: % sorted result.
! 5473: %
! 5474: \edef\temp{%
! 5475: \write\writeto{%
! 5476: \string\entry{\fullindexsortkey}%
! 5477: {\ifx\pagenumbertext\empty\noexpand\folio\else\pagenumbertext\fi}%
! 5478: \bracedtext}%
! 5479: }%
! 5480: \temp
! 5481: }
! 5482:
! 5483: % Put the index entry in the margin if desired (undocumented).
! 5484: \def\maybemarginindex{%
! 5485: \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
! 5486: \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \relax\indextext}}%
! 5487: \fi
! 5488: }
! 5489: \let\SETmarginindex=\relax
! 5490:
! 5491:
! 5492: % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
! 5493: %
! 5494: % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
! 5495: % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
! 5496: % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
! 5497: % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
! 5498: % sequences like this:
! 5499: % @end defun
! 5500: % @tindex whatever
! 5501: % @defun ...
! 5502: % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
! 5503: % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
! 5504: % the previous defun.
! 5505: %
! 5506: % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
! 5507: % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
! 5508: %
! 5509: % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
! 5510: %
! 5511: % But wait, there is a catch there:
! 5512: % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
! 5513: % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
! 5514: % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
! 5515: % representation of the skip.
! 5516: %
! 5517: % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
! 5518: % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
! 5519: %
! 5520: \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
! 5521: %
! 5522: \newskip\whatsitskip
! 5523: \newcount\whatsitpenalty
! 5524: %
! 5525: % ..., ready, GO:
! 5526: %
! 5527: \def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
! 5528: #1%
! 5529: \else
! 5530: % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
! 5531: \whatsitskip = \lastskip
! 5532: \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
! 5533: \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
! 5534: %
! 5535: % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
! 5536: % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
! 5537: % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
! 5538: % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
! 5539: % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
! 5540: \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
! 5541: \else
! 5542: \vskip-\whatsitskip
! 5543: \fi
! 5544: %
! 5545: #1%
! 5546: %
! 5547: \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
! 5548: % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
! 5549: % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
! 5550: % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
! 5551: % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
! 5552: % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
! 5553: % @deffn deffn-whatever
! 5554: % @vindex index-whatever
! 5555: % Description.
! 5556: % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
! 5557: % and the "Description." paragraph.
! 5558: \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
! 5559: \else
! 5560: % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
! 5561: % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
! 5562: % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
! 5563: \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
! 5564: \fi
! 5565: \fi}
! 5566:
! 5567: % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
! 5568: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
! 5569: % or
! 5570: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
! 5571: % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
! 5572: % containing these kinds of lines:
! 5573: % \initial {c}
! 5574: % before the first topic whose initial is c
! 5575: % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
! 5576: % for a topic that is used without subtopics
! 5577: % \primary {topic}
! 5578: % \entry {topic}{}
! 5579: % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
! 5580: % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
! 5581: % for each subtopic.
! 5582: % \secondary {subtopic}{}
! 5583: % for a subtopic with sub-subtopics
! 5584: % \tertiary {subtopic}{subsubtopic}{pagelist}
! 5585: % for each sub-subtopic.
! 5586:
! 5587: % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
! 5588: % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
! 5589:
! 5590: \def\findex {\fnindex}
! 5591: \def\kindex {\kyindex}
! 5592: \def\cindex {\cpindex}
! 5593: \def\vindex {\vrindex}
! 5594: \def\tindex {\tpindex}
! 5595: \def\pindex {\pgindex}
! 5596:
! 5597: % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
! 5598:
! 5599: % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
! 5600: % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
! 5601: %
! 5602: \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
! 5603: \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
! 5604: %
! 5605: \smallfonts \rm
! 5606: \tolerance = 9500
! 5607: \plainfrenchspacing
! 5608: \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
! 5609: %
! 5610: % See comment in \requireopenindexfile.
! 5611: \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi
! 5612: %
! 5613: % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
! 5614: \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s
! 5615: \ifeof 1
! 5616: % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
! 5617: % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
! 5618: % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
! 5619: % there is some text.
! 5620: \putwordIndexNonexistent
! 5621: \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}%
! 5622: \else
! 5623: % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
! 5624: % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
! 5625: % it can discover if there is anything in it.
! 5626: \read 1 to \thisline
! 5627: \ifeof 1
! 5628: \putwordIndexIsEmpty
! 5629: \else
! 5630: \expandafter\printindexzz\thisline\relax\relax\finish%
! 5631: \fi
! 5632: \fi
! 5633: \closein 1
! 5634: \endgroup}
! 5635:
! 5636: % If the index file starts with a backslash, forgo reading the index
! 5637: % file altogether. If somebody upgrades texinfo.tex they may still have
! 5638: % old index files using \ as the escape character. Reading this would
! 5639: % at best lead to typesetting garbage, at worst a TeX syntax error.
! 5640: \def\printindexzz#1#2\finish{%
! 5641: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax
! 5642: \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\if\noexpand~}\noexpand#1
! 5643: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiskipindexfileswithbackslash\endcsname\relax
! 5644: \errmessage{%
! 5645: ERROR: A sorted index file in an obsolete format was skipped.
! 5646: To fix this problem, please upgrade your version of 'texi2dvi'
! 5647: or 'texi2pdf' to that at <https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo>.
! 5648: If you are using an old version of 'texindex' (part of the Texinfo
! 5649: distribution), you may also need to upgrade to a newer version (at least 6.0).
! 5650: You may be able to typeset the index if you run
! 5651: 'texindex \jobname.\indexname' yourself.
! 5652: You could also try setting the 'txiindexescapeisbackslash' flag by
! 5653: running a command like
! 5654: 'texi2dvi -t "@set txiindexescapeisbackslash" \jobname.texi'. If you do
! 5655: this, Texinfo will try to use index files in the old format.
! 5656: If you continue to have problems, deleting the index files and starting again
! 5657: might help (with 'rm \jobname.?? \jobname.??s')%
! 5658: }%
! 5659: \else
! 5660: (Skipped sorted index file in obsolete format)
! 5661: \fi
! 5662: \else
! 5663: \begindoublecolumns
! 5664: \input \jobname.\indexname s
! 5665: \enddoublecolumns
! 5666: \fi
! 5667: \else
! 5668: \begindoublecolumns
! 5669: \catcode`\\=0\relax
! 5670: %
! 5671: % Make @ an escape character to give macros a chance to work. This
! 5672: % should work because we (hopefully) don't otherwise use @ in index files.
! 5673: %\catcode`\@=12\relax
! 5674: \catcode`\@=0\relax
! 5675: \input \jobname.\indexname s
! 5676: \enddoublecolumns
! 5677: \fi
! 5678: }
! 5679:
! 5680: % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
! 5681: % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
! 5682:
! 5683: {\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13
! 5684: \catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13
! 5685: \catcode`\$=3
! 5686: \gdef\initialglyphs{%
! 5687: % special control sequences used in the index sort key
! 5688: \let\indexlbrace\{%
! 5689: \let\indexrbrace\}%
! 5690: \let\indexatchar\@%
! 5691: \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}%
! 5692: %
! 5693: % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the
! 5694: % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere
! 5695: % for these characters.
! 5696: \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\math{\backslash}}}
! 5697: %
! 5698: % In case @\ is used for backslash
! 5699: \uppercase{\let\\=~}
! 5700: % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash
! 5701: \catcode`\/=13
! 5702: \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}%
! 5703: \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--'
! 5704: \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}%
! 5705: \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}%
! 5706: \def\_{%
! 5707: \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }%
! 5708: \def|{$\vert$}%
! 5709: \def<{$\less$}%
! 5710: \def>{$\gtr$}%
! 5711: \def+{$\normalplus$}%
! 5712: }}
! 5713:
! 5714: \def\initial{%
! 5715: \bgroup
! 5716: \initialglyphs
! 5717: \initialx
! 5718: }
! 5719:
! 5720: \def\initialx#1{%
! 5721: % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
! 5722: \removelastskip
! 5723: %
! 5724: % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
! 5725: % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the
! 5726: % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing.
! 5727: \nobreak
! 5728: \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip
! 5729: \penalty -300
! 5730: \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip
! 5731: %
! 5732: % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
! 5733: % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
! 5734: % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
! 5735: % we need before each entry, but it's better.
! 5736: %
! 5737: % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
! 5738: \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip
! 5739: \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}%
! 5740: % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of
! 5741: % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that
! 5742: % \leftline creates.
! 5743: % Do our best not to break after the initial.
! 5744: \nobreak
! 5745: \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
! 5746: \egroup % \initialglyphs
! 5747: }
! 5748:
! 5749: \newdimen\entryrightmargin
! 5750: \entryrightmargin=0pt
! 5751:
! 5752: % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
! 5753: % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
! 5754: % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
! 5755: %
! 5756: \def\entry{%
! 5757: \begingroup
! 5758: %
! 5759: % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
! 5760: % affect previous text.
! 5761: \par
! 5762: %
! 5763: % No extra space above this paragraph.
! 5764: \parskip = 0in
! 5765: %
! 5766: % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
! 5767: % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section
! 5768: % titles, for instance.
! 5769: \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
! 5770: \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command
! 5771: %
! 5772: % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
! 5773: \afterassignment\doentry
! 5774: \let\temp =
! 5775: }
! 5776: \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
! 5777: \def\doentry{%
! 5778: % Save the text of the entry
! 5779: \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup
! 5780: \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
! 5781: \noindent
! 5782: \aftergroup\finishentry
! 5783: % And now comes the text of the entry.
! 5784: % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems
! 5785: % with catcodes occurring.
! 5786: }
! 5787: {\catcode`\@=11
! 5788: \gdef\finishentry#1{%
! 5789: \egroup % end box A
! 5790: \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry
! 5791: \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup
! 5792: \unhbox\boxA
! 5793: % #1 is the page number.
! 5794: %
! 5795: % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use
! 5796: % leaders if they are present.
! 5797: \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}%
! 5798: \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt
! 5799: \null\nobreak\hfill\ %
! 5800: \else
! 5801: %
! 5802: \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
! 5803: %
! 5804: \ifpdforxetex
! 5805: \pdfgettoks#1.%
! 5806: \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA
! 5807: \else
! 5808: \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1%
! 5809: \fi
! 5810: \fi
! 5811: \egroup % end \boxA
! 5812: \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt
! 5813: \noindent\unhbox\boxA\par
! 5814: \nobreak
! 5815: \else\bgroup
! 5816: % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the
! 5817: % page numbers to be aligned to the right.
! 5818: %
! 5819: \parindent = 0pt
! 5820: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil
! 5821: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill
! 5822: \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil
! 5823: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill
! 5824: % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own
! 5825: % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right.
! 5826: \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill
! 5827: %
! 5828: \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin
! 5829: % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin.
! 5830: % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to
! 5831: % fit on one line in @letterpaper format.
! 5832: \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em
! 5833: \dimen@i=2.1em
! 5834: \else
! 5835: \dimen@i=0em
! 5836: \fi
! 5837: \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i
! 5838: %
! 5839: \dimen@ii = \hsize
! 5840: \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip
! 5841: \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin
! 5842: \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i
! 5843: \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line
! 5844: \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text
! 5845: % Try to split the text roughly evenly. \dimen@ will be the length of
! 5846: % the first line.
! 5847: \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@
! 5848: \dimen@ii = \hsize
! 5849: \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii
! 5850: % If the entry is too long (for example, if it needs more than
! 5851: % two lines), use all the space in the first line.
! 5852: \dimen@ = \dimen@ii
! 5853: \fi
! 5854: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right
! 5855: \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip
! 5856: \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii
! 5857: % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only,
! 5858: % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX
! 5859: % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing.
! 5860: %
! 5861: % Indent all lines but the first one.
! 5862: \advance\leftskip by 1em
! 5863: \advance\parindent by -1em
! 5864: \fi\fi
! 5865: \indent % start paragraph
! 5866: \unhbox\boxA
! 5867: %
! 5868: % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
! 5869: \finalhyphendemerits = 0
! 5870: %
! 5871: % Word spacing - no stretch
! 5872: \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font
! 5873: %
! 5874: \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks.
! 5875: \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation.
! 5876: %
! 5877: \par % format the paragraph
! 5878: \egroup % The \vbox
! 5879: \fi
! 5880: \endgroup
! 5881: }}
! 5882:
! 5883: \newskip\thinshrinkable
! 5884: \skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em
! 5885:
! 5886: % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
! 5887: % The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push
! 5888: % the page number to the right.
! 5889: \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
! 5890: \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll}
! 5891:
! 5892:
! 5893: \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
! 5894:
! 5895: \def\secondary{\indententry{0.5cm}}
! 5896: \def\tertiary{\indententry{1cm}}
! 5897:
! 5898: \def\indententry#1#2#3{%
! 5899: \bgroup
! 5900: \leftskip=#1
! 5901: \entry{#2}{#3}%
! 5902: \egroup
! 5903: }
! 5904:
! 5905: % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
! 5906: % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
! 5907: % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
! 5908: \catcode`\@=11 % private names
! 5909:
! 5910: \newbox\partialpage
! 5911: \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
! 5912:
! 5913: \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
! 5914: % If not much space left on page, start a new page.
! 5915: \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi
! 5916: %
! 5917: % Grab any single-column material above us.
! 5918: \output = {%
! 5919: \savetopmark
! 5920: %
! 5921: \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
! 5922: % Unvbox the main output page.
! 5923: \unvbox\PAGE
! 5924: \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
! 5925: }%
! 5926: }%
! 5927: \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
! 5928: %
! 5929: % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
! 5930: \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
! 5931: %
! 5932: % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
! 5933: % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
! 5934: % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
! 5935: % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
! 5936: % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
! 5937: %
! 5938: % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
! 5939: % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
! 5940: % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
! 5941: % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
! 5942: % as it did when we hard-coded it.
! 5943: %
! 5944: % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
! 5945: % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
! 5946: % been clobbered.
! 5947: %
! 5948: \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
! 5949: \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
! 5950: \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
! 5951: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
! 5952: %
! 5953: % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
! 5954: % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
! 5955: % previous page.
! 5956: \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
! 5957: \vsize = 2\vsize
! 5958: %
! 5959: % For the benefit of balancing columns
! 5960: \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt
! 5961: }
! 5962:
! 5963: % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
! 5964: % the last, which is done by \balancecolumns.
! 5965: %
! 5966: \def\doublecolumnout{%
! 5967: %
! 5968: \savetopmark
! 5969: \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
! 5970: \dimen@ = \vsize
! 5971: \divide\dimen@ by 2
! 5972: %
! 5973: % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
! 5974: \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@
! 5975: \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage
! 5976: \onepageout\pagesofar % empty except for the first time we are called
! 5977: \unvbox\PAGE
! 5978: \penalty\outputpenalty
! 5979: }
! 5980: %
! 5981: % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
! 5982: % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
! 5983: \def\pagesofar{%
! 5984: \unvbox\partialpage
! 5985: %
! 5986: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
! 5987: \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
! 5988: \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
! 5989: }
! 5990:
! 5991:
! 5992: % Finished with double columns.
! 5993: \def\enddoublecolumns{%
! 5994: % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
! 5995: % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
! 5996: % following situation:
! 5997: %
! 5998: % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
! 5999: % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
! 6000: % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
! 6001: % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
! 6002: % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
! 6003: % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
! 6004: % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
! 6005: % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
! 6006: % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
! 6007: % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
! 6008: % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
! 6009: % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
! 6010: % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
! 6011: % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
! 6012: % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
! 6013: % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
! 6014: % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
! 6015: % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see
! 6016: % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
! 6017: %
! 6018: % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
! 6019: % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
! 6020: \penalty0
! 6021: %
! 6022: \output = {%
! 6023: % Split the last of the double-column material.
! 6024: \savetopmark
! 6025: \balancecolumns
! 6026: }%
! 6027: \eject % call the \output just set
! 6028: \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt
! 6029: % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
! 6030: % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
! 6031: % definition right away.
! 6032: \global\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput}
! 6033: %
! 6034: \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
! 6035: % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic
! 6036: % page break.
! 6037: \box\balancedcolumns
! 6038: %
! 6039: % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
! 6040: % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
! 6041: % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize.
! 6042: \global\vsize = \txipageheight %
! 6043: \pagegoal = \txipageheight %
! 6044: \else
! 6045: % We had some left-over material. This might happen when \doublecolumnout
! 6046: % is called in \balancecolumns. Try again.
! 6047: \expandafter\enddoublecolumns
! 6048: \fi
! 6049: }
! 6050: \newbox\balancedcolumns
! 6051: \setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}%
! 6052: %
! 6053: % Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout
! 6054: % does the others.
! 6055: \def\balancecolumns{%
! 6056: \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
! 6057: \dimen@ = \ht0
! 6058: \ifdim\dimen@<7\baselineskip
! 6059: % Don't split a short final column in two.
! 6060: \setbox2=\vbox{}%
! 6061: \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}%
! 6062: \else
! 6063: % double the leading vertical space
! 6064: \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
! 6065: \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
! 6066: \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
! 6067: \dimen@ii = \dimen@
! 6068: \splittopskip = \topskip
! 6069: % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column.
! 6070: {%
! 6071: \vbadness = 10000
! 6072: \loop
! 6073: \global\setbox3 = \copy0
! 6074: \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
! 6075: \ifdim\ht1<\ht3
! 6076: \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
! 6077: \repeat
! 6078: }%
! 6079: % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3.
! 6080: %
! 6081: % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself.
! 6082: % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so
! 6083: % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize).
! 6084: \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize
! 6085: % It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material.
! 6086: % Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page.
! 6087: \setbox\PAGE=\box0
! 6088: \doublecolumnout
! 6089: \else
! 6090: % Compare the heights of the two columns.
! 6091: \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3
! 6092: % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms
! 6093: % flush with each other.
! 6094: \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}%
! 6095: \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}%
! 6096: \else
! 6097: % Make column bottoms flush with each other.
! 6098: \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}%
! 6099: \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}%
! 6100: \fi
! 6101: \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}%
! 6102: \fi
! 6103: \fi
! 6104: %
! 6105: }
! 6106: \catcode`\@ = \other
! 6107:
! 6108:
! 6109: \message{sectioning,}
! 6110: % Chapters, sections, etc.
! 6111:
! 6112: % Let's start with @part.
! 6113: \outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
! 6114: \def\partzzz#1{%
! 6115: \chapoddpage
! 6116: \null
! 6117: \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit
! 6118: \begingroup
! 6119: \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text
! 6120: \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with
! 6121: \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
! 6122: \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page
! 6123: % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter
! 6124: % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents.
! 6125: \let\pchapsepmacro\relax
! 6126: \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
! 6127: \chapoddpage
! 6128: \endgroup
! 6129: }
! 6130:
! 6131: % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered
! 6132: % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
! 6133: % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
! 6134: % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
! 6135: % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
! 6136: \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
! 6137: \newcount\chapno
! 6138: \newcount\secno \secno=0
! 6139: \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
! 6140: \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
! 6141:
! 6142: % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
! 6143: \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
! 6144: %
! 6145: % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
! 6146: % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
! 6147: % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
! 6148: % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
! 6149: %
! 6150: \def\appendixletter{%
! 6151: \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
! 6152: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
! 6153: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
! 6154: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
! 6155: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
! 6156: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
! 6157: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
! 6158: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
! 6159: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
! 6160: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
! 6161: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
! 6162: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
! 6163: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
! 6164: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
! 6165: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
! 6166: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
! 6167: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
! 6168: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
! 6169: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
! 6170: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
! 6171: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
! 6172: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
! 6173: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
! 6174: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
! 6175: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
! 6176: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
! 6177: % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
! 6178: % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
! 6179: % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
! 6180: % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
! 6181: \else\char\the\appendixno
! 6182: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 6183: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
! 6184:
! 6185: % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
! 6186: % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
! 6187: % these. @section does likewise.
! 6188: \def\thischapter{}
! 6189: \def\thischapternum{}
! 6190: \def\thischaptername{}
! 6191: \def\thissection{}
! 6192: \def\thissectionnum{}
! 6193: \def\thissectionname{}
! 6194:
! 6195: \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
! 6196: \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
! 6197:
! 6198: % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
! 6199: \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
! 6200:
! 6201: % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
! 6202: \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
! 6203:
! 6204: % we only have subsub.
! 6205: \chardef\maxseclevel = 3
! 6206: %
! 6207: % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
! 6208: % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
! 6209: \chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
! 6210: %
! 6211: % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
! 6212: % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
! 6213: \def\chapheadtype{N}
! 6214:
! 6215: % Choose a heading macro
! 6216: % #1 is heading type
! 6217: % #2 is heading level
! 6218: % #3 is text for heading
! 6219: \def\genhead#1#2#3{%
! 6220: % Compute the abs. sec. level:
! 6221: \absseclevel=#2
! 6222: \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
! 6223: % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
! 6224: \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
! 6225: \absseclevel = 0
! 6226: \else
! 6227: \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
! 6228: \absseclevel = 3
! 6229: \fi
! 6230: \fi
! 6231: % The heading type:
! 6232: \def\headtype{#1}%
! 6233: \if \headtype U%
! 6234: \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
! 6235: \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
! 6236: \fi
! 6237: \else
! 6238: % Check for appendix sections:
! 6239: \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
! 6240: \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
! 6241: \else
! 6242: \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
! 6243: \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
! 6244: \fi\fi
! 6245: \fi
! 6246: % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
! 6247: \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
! 6248: \def\headtype{U}%
! 6249: \else
! 6250: \chardef\unnlevel = 3
! 6251: \fi
! 6252: \fi
! 6253: % Now print the heading:
! 6254: \if \headtype U%
! 6255: \ifcase\absseclevel
! 6256: \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
! 6257: \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
! 6258: \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
! 6259: \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
! 6260: \fi
! 6261: \else
! 6262: \if \headtype A%
! 6263: \ifcase\absseclevel
! 6264: \appendixzzz{#3}%
! 6265: \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
! 6266: \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
! 6267: \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
! 6268: \fi
! 6269: \else
! 6270: \ifcase\absseclevel
! 6271: \chapterzzz{#3}%
! 6272: \or \seczzz{#3}%
! 6273: \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
! 6274: \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
! 6275: \fi
! 6276: \fi
! 6277: \fi
! 6278: \suppressfirstparagraphindent
! 6279: }
! 6280:
! 6281: % an interface:
! 6282: \def\numhead{\genhead N}
! 6283: \def\apphead{\genhead A}
! 6284: \def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
! 6285:
! 6286: % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
! 6287: % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
! 6288: %
! 6289: % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
! 6290: % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
! 6291: \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
! 6292: %
! 6293: \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
! 6294: \def\chapterzzz#1{%
! 6295: % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
! 6296: % as an @include file.
! 6297: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
! 6298: \global\advance\chapno by 1
! 6299: %
! 6300: % Used for \float.
! 6301: \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
! 6302: \resetallfloatnos
! 6303: %
! 6304: % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
! 6305: \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
! 6306: \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
! 6307: %
! 6308: % Write the actual heading.
! 6309: \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
! 6310: %
! 6311: % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
! 6312: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
! 6313: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
! 6314: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
! 6315: }
! 6316:
! 6317: \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
! 6318: %
! 6319: \def\appendixzzz#1{%
! 6320: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
! 6321: \global\advance\appendixno by 1
! 6322: \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
! 6323: \resetallfloatnos
! 6324: %
! 6325: % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
! 6326: \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
! 6327: \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
! 6328: %
! 6329: \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
! 6330: %
! 6331: \global\let\section = \appendixsec
! 6332: \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
! 6333: \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
! 6334: }
! 6335:
! 6336: % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
! 6337: \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
! 6338: \def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
! 6339: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
! 6340: \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
! 6341: %
! 6342: % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
! 6343: \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
! 6344: \resetallfloatnos
! 6345: %
! 6346: % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
! 6347: % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
! 6348: % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
! 6349: % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
! 6350: % to be executed, not expanded).
! 6351: %
! 6352: % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
! 6353: % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
! 6354: % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
! 6355: % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
! 6356: % the toc entries.)
! 6357: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 6358: \message{(\the\toks0)}%
! 6359: %
! 6360: \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
! 6361: %
! 6362: \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
! 6363: \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
! 6364: \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
! 6365: }
! 6366:
! 6367: % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
! 6368: \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
! 6369: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
! 6370: \unnmhead0{#1}%
! 6371: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
! 6372: }
! 6373:
! 6374: % @top is like @unnumbered.
! 6375: \let\top\unnumbered
! 6376:
! 6377: % Sections.
! 6378: %
! 6379: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
! 6380: \def\seczzz#1{%
! 6381: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
! 6382: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
! 6383: }
! 6384:
! 6385: % normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
! 6386: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
! 6387: \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
! 6388: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
! 6389: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
! 6390: }
! 6391: \let\appendixsec\appendixsection
! 6392:
! 6393: % normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
! 6394: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
! 6395: \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
! 6396: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
! 6397: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
! 6398: }
! 6399:
! 6400: % Subsections.
! 6401: %
! 6402: % normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
! 6403: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
! 6404: \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
! 6405: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
! 6406: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
! 6407: }
! 6408:
! 6409: % normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
! 6410: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
! 6411: \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
! 6412: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
! 6413: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
! 6414: {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
! 6415: }
! 6416:
! 6417: % normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
! 6418: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
! 6419: \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
! 6420: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
! 6421: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
! 6422: {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
! 6423: }
! 6424:
! 6425: % Subsubsections.
! 6426: %
! 6427: % normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
! 6428: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
! 6429: \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
! 6430: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
! 6431: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
! 6432: {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
! 6433: }
! 6434:
! 6435: % normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
! 6436: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
! 6437: \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
! 6438: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
! 6439: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
! 6440: {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
! 6441: }
! 6442:
! 6443: % normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
! 6444: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
! 6445: \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
! 6446: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
! 6447: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
! 6448: {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
! 6449: }
! 6450:
! 6451: % These macros control what the section commands do, according
! 6452: % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
! 6453: % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
! 6454: \let\section = \numberedsec
! 6455: \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
! 6456: \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
! 6457:
! 6458: % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
! 6459:
! 6460: \def\majorheading{%
! 6461: {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
! 6462: \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
! 6463: }
! 6464:
! 6465: \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
! 6466: \def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
! 6467: \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
! 6468: \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
! 6469: \suppressfirstparagraphindent
! 6470: }
! 6471:
! 6472: % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
! 6473: \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
! 6474: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
! 6475: \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
! 6476: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
! 6477: \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
! 6478: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
! 6479:
! 6480: % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
! 6481: % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
! 6482: % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
! 6483:
! 6484: % Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
! 6485: \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
! 6486:
! 6487: % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
! 6488: \newskip\chapheadingskip
! 6489:
! 6490: % Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
! 6491: \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
! 6492:
! 6493: % Start a new page
! 6494: \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
! 6495:
! 6496: % \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter
! 6497: % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
! 6498: % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
! 6499: % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
! 6500: \def\chapoddpage{%
! 6501: \chappager
! 6502: \ifodd\pageno \else
! 6503: \begingroup
! 6504: \headingsoff
! 6505: \null
! 6506: \chappager
! 6507: \endgroup
! 6508: \fi
! 6509: }
! 6510:
! 6511: \parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
! 6512:
! 6513: \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
! 6514: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 6515: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
! 6516: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsinglechapoff}}
! 6517:
! 6518: \def\CHAPPAGon{%
! 6519: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 6520: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
! 6521: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
! 6522:
! 6523: \def\CHAPPAGodd{%
! 6524: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
! 6525: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
! 6526: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
! 6527:
! 6528: \CHAPPAGon
! 6529:
! 6530: % \chapmacro - Chapter opening.
! 6531: %
! 6532: % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
! 6533: % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
! 6534: % Not used for @heading series.
! 6535: %
! 6536: % To test against our argument.
! 6537: \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
! 6538: \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
! 6539: \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
! 6540: %
! 6541: \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
! 6542: \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else
! 6543: \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment.
! 6544: \fi
! 6545: % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
! 6546: \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs
! 6547: \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
! 6548: \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
! 6549: \gdef\thissection{}}%
! 6550: %
! 6551: \def\temptype{#2}%
! 6552: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
! 6553: \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
! 6554: \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
! 6555: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
! 6556: \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
! 6557: \gdef\thischapter{}}%
! 6558: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
! 6559: \toks0={#1}%
! 6560: \xdef\currentchapterdefs{%
! 6561: \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
! 6562: \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
! 6563: % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
! 6564: % commands in some of the translations.
! 6565: \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
! 6566: \noexpand\thischapternum:
! 6567: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
! 6568: }%
! 6569: \else
! 6570: \toks0={#1}%
! 6571: \xdef\currentchapterdefs{%
! 6572: \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
! 6573: \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
! 6574: % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
! 6575: % commands in some of the translations.
! 6576: \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
! 6577: \noexpand\thischapternum:
! 6578: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
! 6579: }%
! 6580: \fi\fi\fi
! 6581: %
! 6582: % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
! 6583: % the preceding space.
! 6584: \safewhatsit\domark
! 6585: %
! 6586: % Insert the chapter heading break.
! 6587: \pchapsepmacro
! 6588: %
! 6589: % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
! 6590: % between here and the heading.
! 6591: \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs
! 6592: \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
! 6593: \domark
! 6594: %
! 6595: {%
! 6596: \chapfonts \rm
! 6597: \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message
! 6598: %
! 6599: % Have to define \currentsection before calling \donoderef, because the
! 6600: % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
! 6601: % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
! 6602: \gdef\currentsection{#1}%
! 6603: %
! 6604: % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
! 6605: % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
! 6606: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
! 6607: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
! 6608: \def\toctype{unnchap}%
! 6609: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
! 6610: \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
! 6611: \def\toctype{omit}%
! 6612: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
! 6613: \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
! 6614: \def\toctype{app}%
! 6615: \else
! 6616: \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
! 6617: \def\toctype{numchap}%
! 6618: \fi\fi\fi
! 6619: %
! 6620: % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
! 6621: % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
! 6622: % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
! 6623: \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
! 6624: %
! 6625: % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
! 6626: % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
! 6627: % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
! 6628: % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
! 6629: % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
! 6630: \donoderef{#2}%
! 6631: %
! 6632: % Typeset the actual heading.
! 6633: \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
! 6634: \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
! 6635: \unhbox0 #1\par}%
! 6636: }%
! 6637: \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
! 6638: \nobreak
! 6639: }
! 6640:
! 6641: % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
! 6642: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
! 6643: \def\centerparameters{%
! 6644: \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
! 6645: \leftskip = \rightskip
! 6646: \parfillskip = 0pt
! 6647: }
! 6648:
! 6649:
! 6650: % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
! 6651: % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
! 6652: %
! 6653: \newskip\secheadingskip
! 6654: \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
! 6655:
! 6656: % Subsection titles.
! 6657: \newskip\subsecheadingskip
! 6658: \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
! 6659:
! 6660: % Subsubsection titles.
! 6661: \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
! 6662: \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
! 6663:
! 6664:
! 6665: % Print any size, any type, section title.
! 6666: %
! 6667: % #1 is the text of the title,
! 6668: % #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec),
! 6669: % #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc),
! 6670: % #4 is the section number.
! 6671: %
! 6672: \def\seckeyword{sec}
! 6673: %
! 6674: \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
! 6675: {%
! 6676: \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
! 6677: \def\temptype{#3}%
! 6678: %
! 6679: % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an
! 6680: % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is
! 6681: % dubious), but not the others.
! 6682: \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else
! 6683: \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment.
! 6684: \fi
! 6685: \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading
! 6686: %
! 6687: % Switch to the right set of fonts.
! 6688: \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
! 6689: %
! 6690: % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
! 6691: \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
! 6692: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
! 6693: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
! 6694: \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
! 6695: \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
! 6696: \fi
! 6697: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
! 6698: % Don't redefine \thissection.
! 6699: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
! 6700: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
! 6701: \toks0={#1}%
! 6702: \xdef\currentsectiondefs{%
! 6703: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
! 6704: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
! 6705: % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
! 6706: % commands in some of the translations.
! 6707: \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
! 6708: \noexpand\thissectionnum:
! 6709: \noexpand\thissectionname}%
! 6710: }%
! 6711: \fi
! 6712: \else
! 6713: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
! 6714: \toks0={#1}%
! 6715: \xdef\currentsectiondefs{%
! 6716: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
! 6717: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
! 6718: % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
! 6719: % commands in some of the translations.
! 6720: \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
! 6721: \noexpand\thissectionnum:
! 6722: \noexpand\thissectionname}%
! 6723: }%
! 6724: \fi
! 6725: \fi\fi\fi
! 6726: %
! 6727: % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
! 6728: % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
! 6729: % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
! 6730: \par
! 6731: %
! 6732: % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
! 6733: % the preceding space.
! 6734: \safewhatsit\domark
! 6735: %
! 6736: % Insert space above the heading.
! 6737: \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
! 6738: %
! 6739: % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
! 6740: % between here and the heading.
! 6741: \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
! 6742: \domark
! 6743: %
! 6744: % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
! 6745: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
! 6746: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
! 6747: \def\toctype{unn}%
! 6748: \gdef\currentsection{#1}%
! 6749: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
! 6750: % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
! 6751: % and don't redefine \currentsection.
! 6752: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
! 6753: \def\toctype{omit}%
! 6754: \let\sectionlevel=\empty
! 6755: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
! 6756: \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
! 6757: \def\toctype{app}%
! 6758: \gdef\currentsection{#1}%
! 6759: \else
! 6760: \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
! 6761: \def\toctype{num}%
! 6762: \gdef\currentsection{#1}%
! 6763: \fi\fi\fi
! 6764: %
! 6765: % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
! 6766: \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
! 6767: %
! 6768: % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
! 6769: % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
! 6770: \donoderef{#3}%
! 6771: %
! 6772: % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
! 6773: % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
! 6774: % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
! 6775: % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
! 6776: % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
! 6777: % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
! 6778: \nobreak
! 6779: %
! 6780: % Output the actual section heading.
! 6781: \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
! 6782: \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
! 6783: \unhbox0 #1}%
! 6784: }%
! 6785: % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
! 6786: % Don't allow stretch, though.
! 6787: \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
! 6788: %
! 6789: % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
! 6790: % was followed by glue.
! 6791: \nobreak
! 6792: %
! 6793: % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
! 6794: % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
! 6795: % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next
! 6796: % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
! 6797: % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
! 6798: % obscuring the section heading with something else.
! 6799: \vskip-\parskip
! 6800: %
! 6801: % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
! 6802: % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
! 6803: % and do the needful.
! 6804: \penalty 10001
! 6805: }
! 6806:
! 6807:
! 6808: \message{toc,}
! 6809: % Table of contents.
! 6810: \newwrite\tocfile
! 6811:
! 6812: % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
! 6813: % Called from @chapter, etc.
! 6814: %
! 6815: % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
! 6816: % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
! 6817: % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
! 6818: % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
! 6819: % destination to jump to.
! 6820: %
! 6821: % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
! 6822: % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
! 6823: % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
! 6824: % table of contents chapter openings themselves.
! 6825: %
! 6826: \newif\iftocfileopened
! 6827: \def\omitkeyword{omit}%
! 6828: %
! 6829: \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
! 6830: \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
! 6831: \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
! 6832: \iftocfileopened\else
! 6833: \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
! 6834: \global\tocfileopenedtrue
! 6835: \fi
! 6836: %
! 6837: \iflinks
! 6838: {\atdummies
! 6839: \edef\temp{%
! 6840: \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
! 6841: \temp
! 6842: }%
! 6843: \fi
! 6844: \fi
! 6845: %
! 6846: % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
! 6847: % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
! 6848: % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
! 6849: % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
! 6850: % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
! 6851: % `1', and two named `2'.
! 6852: \ifpdforxetex
! 6853: \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue
! 6854: \fi
! 6855: }
! 6856:
! 6857:
! 6858: % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
! 6859: % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
! 6860: % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
! 6861: %
! 6862: \def\activecatcodes{%
! 6863: \catcode`\"=\active
! 6864: \catcode`\$=\active
! 6865: \catcode`\<=\active
! 6866: \catcode`\>=\active
! 6867: \catcode`\\=\active
! 6868: \catcode`\^=\active
! 6869: \catcode`\_=\active
! 6870: \catcode`\|=\active
! 6871: \catcode`\~=\active
! 6872: }
! 6873:
! 6874:
! 6875: % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
! 6876: \def\readtocfile{%
! 6877: \setupdatafile
! 6878: \activecatcodes
! 6879: \input \tocreadfilename
! 6880: }
! 6881:
! 6882: \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
! 6883: \newcount\savepageno
! 6884: \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
! 6885:
! 6886: % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
! 6887: %
! 6888: \def\startcontents#1{%
! 6889: % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
! 6890: % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.
! 6891: \contentsalignmacro
! 6892: \immediate\closeout\tocfile
! 6893: %
! 6894: % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
! 6895: % It is abundantly clear what they are.
! 6896: \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
! 6897: %
! 6898: \savepageno = \pageno
! 6899: \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
! 6900: \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
! 6901: \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
! 6902: %
! 6903: % Roman numerals for page numbers.
! 6904: \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
! 6905: \def\thistitle{}% no title in double-sided headings
! 6906: % Record where the Roman numerals started.
! 6907: \ifnum\romancount=0 \global\romancount=\pagecount \fi
! 6908: }
! 6909:
! 6910: % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
! 6911: % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
! 6912: %
! 6913: \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
! 6914:
! 6915: % Normal (long) toc.
! 6916: %
! 6917: \def\contents{%
! 6918: \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
! 6919: \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
! 6920: \ifeof 1 \else
! 6921: \readtocfile
! 6922: \fi
! 6923: \vfill \eject
! 6924: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
! 6925: \ifeof 1 \else
! 6926: \pdfmakeoutlines
! 6927: \fi
! 6928: \closein 1
! 6929: \endgroup
! 6930: \contentsendroman
! 6931: }
! 6932:
! 6933: % And just the chapters.
! 6934: \def\summarycontents{%
! 6935: \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
! 6936: %
! 6937: \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
! 6938: \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
! 6939: \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
! 6940: \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
! 6941: % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
! 6942: \secfonts
! 6943: \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
! 6944: \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
! 6945: \rm
! 6946: \hyphenpenalty = 10000
! 6947: \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
! 6948: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
! 6949: \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6950: \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6951: \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6952: \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6953: \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6954: \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6955: \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6956: \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
! 6957: \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
! 6958: \ifeof 1 \else
! 6959: \readtocfile
! 6960: \fi
! 6961: \closein 1
! 6962: \vfill \eject
! 6963: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
! 6964: \endgroup
! 6965: \contentsendroman
! 6966: }
! 6967: \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
! 6968:
! 6969: % Get ready to use Arabic numerals again
! 6970: \def\contentsendroman{%
! 6971: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
! 6972: \global\pageno = \savepageno
! 6973: %
! 6974: % If \romancount > \arabiccount, the contents are at the end of the
! 6975: % document. Otherwise, advance where the Arabic numerals start for
! 6976: % the page numbers.
! 6977: \ifnum\romancount>\arabiccount\else\global\arabiccount=\pagecount\fi
! 6978: }
! 6979:
! 6980: % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
! 6981: % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
! 6982: %
! 6983: \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
! 6984: % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
! 6985: % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
! 6986: % But use \hss just in case.
! 6987: % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
! 6988: % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
! 6989: %
! 6990: % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
! 6991: % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
! 6992: % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
! 6993: % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
! 6994: % there are before deciding ...
! 6995: \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
! 6996: }
! 6997:
! 6998: % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
! 6999: % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
! 7000: % The last argument is the page number.
! 7001: % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
! 7002:
! 7003: % Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't
! 7004: % exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
! 7005: % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
! 7006: \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
! 7007: \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 7008: % Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading.
! 7009: % This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the
! 7010: % part heading, before a following chapter heading.
! 7011: \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip
! 7012: \penalty-300
! 7013: \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip
! 7014: \dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}%
! 7015: }
! 7016: %
! 7017: % Parts, in the short toc.
! 7018: \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 7019: \penalty-300
! 7020: \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
! 7021: \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
! 7022: }
! 7023:
! 7024: % Chapters, in the main contents.
! 7025: \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
! 7026:
! 7027: % Chapters, in the short toc.
! 7028: % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
! 7029: \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
! 7030: \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
! 7031: }
! 7032:
! 7033: % Appendices, in the main contents.
! 7034: % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
! 7035: %
! 7036: \def\appendixbox#1{%
! 7037: % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
! 7038: \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
! 7039: \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
! 7040: %
! 7041: \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}}
! 7042:
! 7043: % Unnumbered chapters.
! 7044: \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
! 7045: \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
! 7046:
! 7047: % Sections.
! 7048: \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
! 7049: \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
! 7050: \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
! 7051:
! 7052: % Subsections.
! 7053: \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
! 7054: \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
! 7055: \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
! 7056:
! 7057: % And subsubsections.
! 7058: \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
! 7059: \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
! 7060: \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
! 7061:
! 7062: % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
! 7063: % Same as \defaultparindent.
! 7064: \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
! 7065:
! 7066: % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
! 7067: % page number.
! 7068: %
! 7069: % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
! 7070: % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
! 7071: \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
! 7072: \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
! 7073: \begingroup
! 7074: % Move the page numbers slightly to the right
! 7075: \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em
! 7076: \chapentryfonts
! 7077: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
! 7078: \endgroup
! 7079: \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
! 7080: }
! 7081:
! 7082: \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
! 7083: \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
! 7084: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
! 7085: \endgroup}
! 7086:
! 7087: \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
! 7088: \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
! 7089: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
! 7090: \endgroup}
! 7091:
! 7092: \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
! 7093: \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
! 7094: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
! 7095: \endgroup}
! 7096:
! 7097: % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
! 7098: \let\tocentry = \entry
! 7099:
! 7100: % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
! 7101: \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
! 7102:
! 7103: \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
! 7104: \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
! 7105:
! 7106: \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
! 7107: \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
! 7108: \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
! 7109: \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
! 7110:
! 7111:
! 7112: \message{environments,}
! 7113: % @foo ... @end foo.
! 7114:
! 7115: % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
! 7116: % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
! 7117: % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
! 7118:
! 7119: \envdef\tex{%
! 7120: \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
! 7121: \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
! 7122: \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
! 7123: \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
! 7124: \catcode `\%=14
! 7125: \catcode `\+=\other
! 7126: \catcode `\"=\other
! 7127: \catcode `\|=\other
! 7128: \catcode `\<=\other
! 7129: \catcode `\>=\other
! 7130: \catcode `\`=\other
! 7131: \catcode `\'=\other
! 7132: %
! 7133: % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our
! 7134: % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
! 7135: \mathactive
! 7136: %
! 7137: % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file.
! 7138: \let\b=\ptexb
! 7139: \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
! 7140: \let\c=\ptexc
! 7141: \let\,=\ptexcomma
! 7142: \let\.=\ptexdot
! 7143: \let\dots=\ptexdots
! 7144: \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
! 7145: \let\!=\ptexexclam
! 7146: \let\i=\ptexi
! 7147: \let\indent=\ptexindent
! 7148: \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
! 7149: \let\{=\ptexlbrace
! 7150: \let\+=\tabalign
! 7151: \let\}=\ptexrbrace
! 7152: \let\/=\ptexslash
! 7153: \let\sp=\ptexsp
! 7154: \let\*=\ptexstar
! 7155: %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode
! 7156: \let\t=\ptext
! 7157: \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer
! 7158: \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
! 7159: %
! 7160: \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
! 7161: \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
! 7162: \def\@{@}%
! 7163: }
! 7164: % There is no need to define \Etex.
! 7165:
! 7166: % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
! 7167: % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
! 7168: % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
! 7169:
! 7170: % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
! 7171: \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
! 7172:
! 7173: % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
! 7174: % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
! 7175: % have any width.
! 7176: \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
! 7177:
! 7178: % This space is always present above and below environments.
! 7179: \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
! 7180:
! 7181: % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
! 7182: % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
! 7183: % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
! 7184: % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
! 7185: %
! 7186: \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
! 7187: % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
! 7188: % \sectionheading, q.v.
! 7189: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
! 7190: \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
! 7191: \endgraf
! 7192: \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
! 7193: \removelastskip
! 7194: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
! 7195: % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text
! 7196: % often leads into it.
! 7197: \penalty100
! 7198: \fi
! 7199: \vskip\envskipamount
! 7200: \fi
! 7201: \fi
! 7202: }}
! 7203:
! 7204: \def\afterenvbreak{{%
! 7205: % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
! 7206: % \sectionheading, q.v.
! 7207: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
! 7208: \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
! 7209: \endgraf
! 7210: \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
! 7211: \removelastskip
! 7212: % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
! 7213: % or better ...
! 7214: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
! 7215: \vskip\envskipamount
! 7216: \fi
! 7217: \fi
! 7218: }}
! 7219:
! 7220: % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
! 7221: % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
! 7222: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
! 7223:
! 7224: % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
! 7225: % environment contents.
! 7226:
! 7227: %
! 7228: \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
! 7229: \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
! 7230: \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
! 7231: \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
! 7232: \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
! 7233: \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
! 7234: \hskip\rskip}}
! 7235: \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
! 7236: \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
! 7237: \hskip\rskip}}
! 7238: %
! 7239: \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
! 7240:
! 7241: % only require the font if @cartouche is actually used
! 7242: \def\cartouchefontdefs{%
! 7243: \font\circle=lcircle10\relax
! 7244: \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
! 7245: }
! 7246: \newdimen\circthick
! 7247: \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
! 7248: \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
! 7249:
! 7250:
! 7251: \envdef\cartouche{%
! 7252: \cartouchefontdefs
! 7253: \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
! 7254: \startsavinginserts
! 7255: \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
! 7256: \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
! 7257: \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
! 7258: \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
! 7259: \cartouter=\hsize
! 7260: \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
! 7261: % side, and for 6pt waste from
! 7262: % each corner char, and rule thickness
! 7263: \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
! 7264: %
! 7265: % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
! 7266: % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
! 7267: % collide with the section heading.
! 7268: \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
! 7269: %
! 7270: \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup
! 7271: \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
! 7272: \carttop
! 7273: \hbox\bgroup
! 7274: \hskip\lskip
! 7275: \vrule\kern3pt
! 7276: \vbox\bgroup
! 7277: \kern3pt
! 7278: \hsize=\cartinner
! 7279: \baselineskip=\normbskip
! 7280: \lineskip=\normlskip
! 7281: \parskip=\normpskip
! 7282: \vskip -\parskip
! 7283: \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
! 7284: }
! 7285: \def\Ecartouche{%
! 7286: \ifhmode\par\fi
! 7287: \kern3pt
! 7288: \egroup
! 7289: \kern3pt\vrule
! 7290: \hskip\rskip
! 7291: \egroup
! 7292: \cartbot
! 7293: \egroup
! 7294: \addgroupbox
! 7295: \checkinserts
! 7296: }
! 7297:
! 7298:
! 7299: % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
! 7300: % inside a group.
! 7301: \newdimen\nonfillparindent
! 7302: \def\nonfillstart{%
! 7303: \aboveenvbreak
! 7304: \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy
! 7305: \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
! 7306: \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
! 7307: \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
! 7308: \parskip = 0pt
! 7309: % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
! 7310: % the normal \indent.
! 7311: \nonfillparindent=\parindent
! 7312: \parindent = 0pt
! 7313: \let\indent\nonfillindent
! 7314: %
! 7315: \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
! 7316: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
! 7317: \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
! 7318: \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
! 7319: \else
! 7320: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
! 7321: \fi
! 7322: \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
! 7323: }
! 7324:
! 7325: \begingroup
! 7326: \obeyspaces
! 7327: % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
! 7328: % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
! 7329: % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
! 7330: % @indent.
! 7331: \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
! 7332: \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
! 7333: \ifx\temp %
! 7334: \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
! 7335: \else%
! 7336: \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
! 7337: \fi%
! 7338: }%
! 7339: \endgroup
! 7340: \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
! 7341: \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
! 7342:
! 7343: % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
! 7344: % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
! 7345: % This affects the following displayed environments:
! 7346: % @example, @display, @format, @lisp
! 7347: %
! 7348: \def\smallword{small}
! 7349: \def\nosmallword{nosmall}
! 7350: \let\SETdispenvsize\relax
! 7351: \def\setnormaldispenv{%
! 7352: \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
! 7353: % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
! 7354: % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
! 7355: % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
! 7356: % to change the fonts afterward.
! 7357: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
! 7358: \smallexamplefonts \rm
! 7359: \fi
! 7360: }
! 7361: \def\setsmalldispenv{%
! 7362: \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
! 7363: \else
! 7364: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
! 7365: \smallexamplefonts \rm
! 7366: \fi
! 7367: }
! 7368:
! 7369: % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
! 7370: % Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
! 7371: \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
! 7372: \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
! 7373: \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
! 7374: \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
! 7375: \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
! 7376: }
! 7377:
! 7378: % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
! 7379: \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
! 7380: \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
! 7381: \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
! 7382: }
! 7383: %
! 7384: % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
! 7385: % @example: same as @lisp.
! 7386: %
! 7387: % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
! 7388: % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
! 7389: %
! 7390: \maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
! 7391: \nonfillstart
! 7392: \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
! 7393: \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
! 7394: \gobble % eat return
! 7395: }
! 7396: % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
! 7397: %
! 7398: \makedispenvdef{display}{%
! 7399: \nonfillstart
! 7400: \gobble
! 7401: }
! 7402:
! 7403: % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
! 7404: %
! 7405: \makedispenvdef{format}{%
! 7406: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 7407: \nonfillstart
! 7408: \gobble
! 7409: }
! 7410:
! 7411: % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
! 7412: \envdef\flushleft{%
! 7413: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 7414: \nonfillstart
! 7415: \gobble
! 7416: }
! 7417: \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
! 7418:
! 7419: % @flushright.
! 7420: %
! 7421: \envdef\flushright{%
! 7422: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 7423: \nonfillstart
! 7424: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
! 7425: \gobble
! 7426: }
! 7427: \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
! 7428:
! 7429:
! 7430: % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
! 7431: % justification. From plain.tex.
! 7432: \envdef\raggedright{%
! 7433: \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
! 7434: }
! 7435: \let\Eraggedright\par
! 7436:
! 7437: \envdef\raggedleft{%
! 7438: \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
! 7439: \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
! 7440: \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
! 7441: % badness reporting.
! 7442: }
! 7443: \let\Eraggedleft\par
! 7444:
! 7445: \envdef\raggedcenter{%
! 7446: \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
! 7447: \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
! 7448: \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
! 7449: % badness reporting.
! 7450: }
! 7451: \let\Eraggedcenter\par
! 7452:
! 7453:
! 7454: % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
! 7455: % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
! 7456: % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
! 7457: % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
! 7458: %
! 7459: \makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
! 7460: %
! 7461: \def\quotationstart{%
! 7462: \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
! 7463: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
! 7464: \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
! 7465: \fi
! 7466: \parsearg\quotationlabel
! 7467: }
! 7468:
! 7469: % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
! 7470: % doing normal filling.
! 7471: %
! 7472: \def\Equotation{%
! 7473: \par
! 7474: \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
! 7475: % indent a bit.
! 7476: \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
! 7477: \fi
! 7478: {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
! 7479: }
! 7480: \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
! 7481:
! 7482: % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
! 7483: \def\quotationlabel#1{%
! 7484: \def\temp{#1}%
! 7485: \ifx\temp\empty \else
! 7486: {\bf #1: }%
! 7487: \fi
! 7488: }
! 7489:
! 7490: % @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
! 7491: % has no optional argument.
! 7492: %
! 7493: \makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
! 7494: %
! 7495: \def\indentedblockstart{%
! 7496: {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
! 7497: \parindent=0pt
! 7498: %
! 7499: % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
! 7500: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
! 7501: \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
! 7502: \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
! 7503: \else
! 7504: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
! 7505: \fi
! 7506: }
! 7507:
! 7508: % Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
! 7509: %
! 7510: \def\Eindentedblock{%
! 7511: \par
! 7512: {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
! 7513: }
! 7514: \def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
! 7515:
! 7516:
! 7517: % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
! 7518: % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
! 7519: % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
! 7520: % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
! 7521: %
! 7522: % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
! 7523: %
! 7524: % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
! 7525: % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
! 7526: % verbatim line.
! 7527: \def\dospecials{%
! 7528: \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
! 7529: \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
! 7530: \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
! 7531: % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
! 7532: % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
! 7533: % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
! 7534: %\do\`\do\'%
! 7535: }
! 7536: %
! 7537: % [Knuth] p. 380
! 7538: \def\uncatcodespecials{%
! 7539: \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
! 7540: %
! 7541: % Setup for the @verb command.
! 7542: %
! 7543: % Eight spaces for a tab
! 7544: \begingroup
! 7545: \catcode`\^^I=\active
! 7546: \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
! 7547: \endgroup
! 7548: %
! 7549: \def\setupverb{%
! 7550: \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
! 7551: \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
! 7552: \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
! 7553: \tabeightspaces
! 7554: % Respect line breaks,
! 7555: % print special symbols as themselves, and
! 7556: % make each space count
! 7557: % must do in this order:
! 7558: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
! 7559: }
! 7560:
! 7561: % Setup for the @verbatim environment
! 7562: %
! 7563: % Real tab expansion.
! 7564: \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
! 7565: %
! 7566: % We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
! 7567: % tabs.
! 7568: \newbox\verbbox
! 7569: \def\starttabbox{\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
! 7570: %
! 7571: \begingroup
! 7572: \catcode`\^^I=\active
! 7573: \gdef\tabexpand{%
! 7574: \catcode`\^^I=\active
! 7575: \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
! 7576: \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
! 7577: \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
! 7578: \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
! 7579: \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
! 7580: \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox
! 7581: \leavevmode\box\verbbox \starttabbox
! 7582: }%
! 7583: }
! 7584: \endgroup
! 7585:
! 7586: % start the verbatim environment.
! 7587: \def\setupverbatim{%
! 7588: \let\nonarrowing = t%
! 7589: \nonfillstart
! 7590: \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
! 7591: \def\par{\egroup\leavevmode\box\verbbox\endgraf\starttabbox}%
! 7592: \tabexpand
! 7593: \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
! 7594: % Respect line breaks,
! 7595: % print special symbols as themselves, and
! 7596: % make each space count.
! 7597: % Must do in this order:
! 7598: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
! 7599: }
! 7600:
! 7601: % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
! 7602: % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
! 7603: % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
! 7604: %
! 7605: % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
! 7606: %
! 7607: % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
! 7608: \begingroup
! 7609: \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
! 7610: \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
! 7611: \endgroup
! 7612: %
! 7613: \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
! 7614: %
! 7615: %
! 7616: % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
! 7617: % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
! 7618: %
! 7619: % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
! 7620: %
! 7621: % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
! 7622: % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
! 7623: % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
! 7624: %
! 7625: % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
! 7626: %
! 7627: \begingroup
! 7628: \catcode`\ =\active
! 7629: \obeylines %
! 7630: % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
! 7631: % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
! 7632: % line in the output.
! 7633: \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{%
! 7634: \starttabbox#2\egroup\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
! 7635: % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
! 7636: % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
! 7637: % The \egroup ends the \verbbox started at the end of the last line in
! 7638: % the block.
! 7639: \endgroup
! 7640: %
! 7641: \envdef\verbatim{%
! 7642: \setupverbatim\doverbatim
! 7643: }
! 7644: \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
! 7645:
! 7646:
! 7647: % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
! 7648: %
! 7649: \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
! 7650: %
! 7651: \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
! 7652: {%
! 7653: \makevalueexpandable
! 7654: \setupverbatim
! 7655: {%
! 7656: \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
! 7657: \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
! 7658: \edef\tmp{\noexpand\input #1 }
! 7659: \expandafter
! 7660: }\expandafter\starttabbox\tmp\egroup
! 7661: \afterenvbreak
! 7662: }%
! 7663: }
! 7664:
! 7665: % @copying ... @end copying.
! 7666: % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
! 7667: %
! 7668: % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
! 7669: % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
! 7670: % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
! 7671: % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
! 7672: % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
! 7673: % possible is desirable.
! 7674: %
! 7675: \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
! 7676: \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
! 7677: %
! 7678: \def\insertcopying{%
! 7679: \begingroup
! 7680: \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
! 7681: \scanexp\copyingtext
! 7682: \endgroup
! 7683: }
! 7684:
! 7685:
! 7686: \message{defuns,}
! 7687: % @defun etc.
! 7688:
! 7689: \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
! 7690: \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
! 7691: \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
! 7692: \newcount\defunpenalty
! 7693:
! 7694: % Start the processing of @deffn:
! 7695: \def\startdefun{%
! 7696: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
! 7697: \medbreak
! 7698: \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
! 7699: % following @def command, see below.
! 7700: \else
! 7701: % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
! 7702: % which is there to keep the function description together with its
! 7703: % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
! 7704: % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
! 7705: % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
! 7706: % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
! 7707: % a break between a section heading and a defun.
! 7708: %
! 7709: % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
! 7710: % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
! 7711: % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
! 7712: % @def command.
! 7713: \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
! 7714: %
! 7715: % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
! 7716: % But do insert the glue.
! 7717: \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
! 7718: \fi
! 7719: %
! 7720: \parindent=0in
! 7721: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
! 7722: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 7723: }
! 7724:
! 7725: \def\dodefunx#1{%
! 7726: % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
! 7727: \checkenv#1%
! 7728: %
! 7729: % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
! 7730: % It's not a great place, though.
! 7731: \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
! 7732: %
! 7733: % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
! 7734: \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
! 7735: }
! 7736: \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
! 7737:
! 7738: % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
! 7739: %
! 7740: \def\printdefunline#1#2{%
! 7741: \begingroup
! 7742: % call \deffnheader:
! 7743: #1#2 \endheader
! 7744: % common ending:
! 7745: \interlinepenalty = 10000
! 7746: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
! 7747: \endgraf
! 7748: \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
! 7749: \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
! 7750: % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
! 7751: % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
! 7752: \checkparencounts
! 7753: \endgroup
! 7754: }
! 7755:
! 7756: \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
! 7757:
! 7758: % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
! 7759: % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
! 7760: %
! 7761: \def\makedefun#1{%
! 7762: \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
! 7763: \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
! 7764: \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
! 7765: \temp
! 7766: }
! 7767:
! 7768: % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) }
! 7769: %
! 7770: % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
! 7771: % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
! 7772: %
! 7773: \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
! 7774: \envdef#1{%
! 7775: \startdefun
! 7776: \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
! 7777: \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
! 7778: }%
! 7779: \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
! 7780: \def#3%
! 7781: }
! 7782:
! 7783: \newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function?
! 7784: \newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line?
! 7785:
! 7786: % @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
! 7787: % are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
! 7788: % @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
! 7789: %
! 7790: \parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
! 7791: \def\temp{#1}%
! 7792: \ifx\temp\onword
! 7793: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
! 7794: = \empty
! 7795: \else\ifx\temp\offword
! 7796: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
! 7797: = \relax
! 7798: \else
! 7799: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 7800: \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
! 7801: must be on|off}%
! 7802: \fi\fi
! 7803: }
! 7804:
! 7805: % \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
! 7806: %
! 7807: % If SUBTOPIC is present, precede it with a space, and call \doind.
! 7808: % (At some time during the 20th century, this made a two-level entry in an
! 7809: % index such as the operation index. Nobody seemed to notice the change in
! 7810: % behaviour though.)
! 7811: \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
! 7812: \def\thirdarg{#3}%
! 7813: \ifx\thirdarg\empty
! 7814: \doind{#1}{#2}%
! 7815: \else
! 7816: \doind{#1}{#2\space#3}%
! 7817: \fi
! 7818: }
! 7819:
! 7820: % Untyped functions:
! 7821:
! 7822: % @deffn category name args
! 7823: \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
! 7824:
! 7825: % @deffn category class name args
! 7826: \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
! 7827:
! 7828: % \defopon {category on}class name args
! 7829: \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
! 7830:
! 7831: % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
! 7832: %
! 7833: \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
! 7834: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
! 7835: \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
! 7836: }
! 7837:
! 7838: % Typed functions:
! 7839:
! 7840: % @deftypefn category type name args
! 7841: \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
! 7842:
! 7843: % @deftypeop category class type name args
! 7844: \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
! 7845:
! 7846: % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
! 7847: \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
! 7848:
! 7849: % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
! 7850: %
! 7851: \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
! 7852: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
! 7853: \doingtypefntrue
! 7854: \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
! 7855: }
! 7856:
! 7857: % Typed variables:
! 7858:
! 7859: % @deftypevr category type var args
! 7860: \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
! 7861:
! 7862: % @deftypecv category class type var args
! 7863: \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
! 7864:
! 7865: % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
! 7866: \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
! 7867:
! 7868: % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
! 7869: %
! 7870: \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
! 7871: \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
! 7872: \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
! 7873: }
! 7874:
! 7875: % Untyped variables:
! 7876:
! 7877: % @defvr category var args
! 7878: \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
! 7879:
! 7880: % @defcv category class var args
! 7881: \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
! 7882:
! 7883: % \defcvof {category of}class var args
! 7884: \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
! 7885:
! 7886: % Types:
! 7887:
! 7888: % @deftp category name args
! 7889: \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
! 7890: \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
! 7891: \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
! 7892: }
! 7893:
! 7894: % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
! 7895: \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
! 7896: \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
! 7897: \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
! 7898: \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
! 7899: \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
! 7900: \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
! 7901: \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
! 7902: \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
! 7903: \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
! 7904: \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
! 7905: \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
! 7906:
! 7907: % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
! 7908: % #1 is the category, such as "Function".
! 7909: % #2 is the return type, if any.
! 7910: % #3 is the function name.
! 7911: %
! 7912: % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
! 7913: %
! 7914: \def\defname#1#2#3{%
! 7915: \par
! 7916: % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
! 7917: \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
! 7918: %
! 7919: % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
! 7920: % on a line by itself.
! 7921: \rettypeownlinefalse
! 7922: \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically?
! 7923: % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
! 7924: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
! 7925: \rettypeownlinetrue
! 7926: \fi
! 7927: \fi
! 7928: %
! 7929: % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps
! 7930: % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
! 7931: % just below it.
! 7932: \def\temp{#1}%
! 7933: \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
! 7934: %
! 7935: % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at
! 7936: % least two.
! 7937: \tempnum = 2
! 7938: %
! 7939: % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
! 7940: % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
! 7941: \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
! 7942: %
! 7943: % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
! 7944: \ifrettypeownline
! 7945: \advance\tempnum by 1
! 7946: \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
! 7947: \else
! 7948: \def\maybeshapeline{}%
! 7949: \fi
! 7950: %
! 7951: % The continuations:
! 7952: \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
! 7953: %
! 7954: % The final paragraph shape:
! 7955: \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2
! 7956: %
! 7957: % Put the category name at the right margin.
! 7958: \noindent
! 7959: \hbox to 0pt{%
! 7960: \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
! 7961: % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
! 7962: \kern\leftskip
! 7963: % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
! 7964: }%
! 7965: %
! 7966: % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
! 7967: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
! 7968: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 7969: {%
! 7970: % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
! 7971: % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
! 7972: % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
! 7973: % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
! 7974: % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
! 7975: % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
! 7976: % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
! 7977: % one has made identifiers using them :).
! 7978: \df \tt
! 7979: \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
! 7980: \ifx\temp\empty\else
! 7981: \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
! 7982: \ifrettypeownline
! 7983: % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
! 7984: \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break
! 7985: \else
! 7986: \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space
! 7987: \fi
! 7988: \fi % no return type
! 7989: #3% output function name
! 7990: }%
! 7991: {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont
! 7992: %
! 7993: \boldbrax
! 7994: % arguments will be output next, if any.
! 7995: }
! 7996:
! 7997: % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
! 7998: % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
! 7999: % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
! 8000: % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
! 8001: %
! 8002: \def\defunargs#1{%
! 8003: % use sl by default (not ttsl),
! 8004: % tt for the names.
! 8005: \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
! 8006: %
! 8007: % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
! 8008: % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so
! 8009: % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter.
! 8010: % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen
! 8011: % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`.
! 8012: \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
! 8013: #1%
! 8014: \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
! 8015: }
! 8016:
! 8017: % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
! 8018: %
! 8019: \def\activeparens{%
! 8020: \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
! 8021: \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
! 8022: \catcode`\&=\active
! 8023: }
! 8024:
! 8025: % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
! 8026: \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
! 8027:
! 8028: % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
! 8029: % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
! 8030: % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
! 8031: {
! 8032: \activeparens
! 8033: \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
! 8034: \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
! 8035: \global\let& = \&
! 8036:
! 8037: \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
! 8038: \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
! 8039: }
! 8040: \let\ampchar\&
! 8041:
! 8042: \newcount\parencount
! 8043:
! 8044: % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
! 8045: \newif\ifampseen
! 8046: \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
! 8047:
! 8048: \def\parenfont{%
! 8049: \ifampseen
! 8050: % At the first level, print parens in roman,
! 8051: % otherwise use the default font.
! 8052: \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
! 8053: \else
! 8054: % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
! 8055: % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
! 8056: \sf
! 8057: \fi
! 8058: }
! 8059: \def\infirstlevel#1{%
! 8060: \ifampseen
! 8061: \ifnum\parencount=1
! 8062: #1%
! 8063: \fi
! 8064: \fi
! 8065: }
! 8066: \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
! 8067:
! 8068: \def\opnr{%
! 8069: \global\advance\parencount by 1
! 8070: {\parenfont(}%
! 8071: \infirstlevel \bfafterword
! 8072: }
! 8073: \def\clnr{%
! 8074: {\parenfont)}%
! 8075: \infirstlevel \sl
! 8076: \global\advance\parencount by -1
! 8077: }
! 8078:
! 8079: \newcount\brackcount
! 8080: \def\lbrb{%
! 8081: \global\advance\brackcount by 1
! 8082: {\bf[}%
! 8083: }
! 8084: \def\rbrb{%
! 8085: {\bf]}%
! 8086: \global\advance\brackcount by -1
! 8087: }
! 8088:
! 8089: \def\checkparencounts{%
! 8090: \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
! 8091: \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
! 8092: }
! 8093: % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
! 8094: % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
! 8095: \def\badparencount{%
! 8096: \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
! 8097: \global\parencount=0
! 8098: }
! 8099: \def\badbrackcount{%
! 8100: \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
! 8101: \global\brackcount=0
! 8102: }
! 8103:
! 8104:
! 8105: \message{macros,}
! 8106: % @macro.
! 8107:
! 8108: % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
! 8109: % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
! 8110: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
! 8111: \newwrite\macscribble
! 8112: \def\scantokens#1{%
! 8113: \toks0={#1}%
! 8114: \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
! 8115: \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
! 8116: \immediate\closeout\macscribble
! 8117: \input \jobname.tmp
! 8118: }
! 8119: \fi
! 8120:
! 8121: % Used at the time of macro expansion.
! 8122: % Argument is macro body with arguments substituted
! 8123: \def\scanmacro#1{%
! 8124: \newlinechar`\^^M
! 8125: \def\xeatspaces{\eatspaces}%
! 8126: %
! 8127: % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime.
! 8128: \scantokens{#1@comment}%
! 8129: %
! 8130: % The \comment is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and
! 8131: % can be noticed by \parsearg. Note \c isn't used because this means cedilla
! 8132: % in math mode.
! 8133: }
! 8134:
! 8135: % Used for copying and captions
! 8136: \def\scanexp#1{%
! 8137: \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}%
! 8138: }
! 8139:
! 8140: \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
! 8141: \newtoks\macname % Macro name
! 8142: \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
! 8143:
! 8144: % List of all defined macros in the form
! 8145: % \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2...
! 8146: % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
! 8147: % if there is a need.
! 8148: \def\macrolist{}
! 8149:
! 8150: % Add the macro to \macrolist
! 8151: \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
! 8152: \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
! 8153: \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}%
! 8154: \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
! 8155: }
! 8156:
! 8157: % Utility routines.
! 8158: % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
! 8159: % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
! 8160: % (except of course we have to play expansion games).
! 8161: %
! 8162: \def\cslet#1#2{%
! 8163: \expandafter\let
! 8164: \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
! 8165: \csname#2\endcsname
! 8166: }
! 8167:
! 8168: % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
! 8169: % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
! 8170: {\catcode`\@=11
! 8171: \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
! 8172: \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
! 8173: \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
! 8174: \def\unbrace#1{#1}
! 8175: \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
! 8176: }
! 8177:
! 8178: % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
! 8179: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
! 8180: \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
! 8181: \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
! 8182: \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
! 8183: }
! 8184:
! 8185: % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
! 8186: % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
! 8187: % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
! 8188: % to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
! 8189: %
! 8190: % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
! 8191: % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
! 8192: % confine the change to the current group.
! 8193: %
! 8194: % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
! 8195: % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
! 8196: % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
! 8197: %
! 8198: \def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
! 8199: \catcode`\"=\other
! 8200: \catcode`\+=\other
! 8201: \catcode`\<=\other
! 8202: \catcode`\>=\other
! 8203: \catcode`\^=\other
! 8204: \catcode`\_=\other
! 8205: \catcode`\|=\other
! 8206: \catcode`\~=\other
! 8207: \passthroughcharstrue
! 8208: }
! 8209:
! 8210: \def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
! 8211: \scanctxt
! 8212: \catcode`\@=\other
! 8213: \catcode`\\=\other
! 8214: \catcode`\^^M=\other
! 8215: }
! 8216:
! 8217: \def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
! 8218: \scanctxt
! 8219: \catcode`\ =\other
! 8220: \catcode`\@=\other
! 8221: \catcode`\{=\other
! 8222: \catcode`\}=\other
! 8223: \catcode`\^^M=\other
! 8224: \usembodybackslash
! 8225: }
! 8226:
! 8227: % Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode
! 8228: % changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside
! 8229: % an argument to another Texinfo command.
! 8230: \def\macroargctxt{%
! 8231: \scanctxt
! 8232: \catcode`\ =\active
! 8233: \catcode`\@=\other
! 8234: \catcode`\^^M=\other
! 8235: \catcode`\\=\active
! 8236: }
! 8237:
! 8238: \def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces
! 8239: \scanctxt
! 8240: \catcode`\@=\other
! 8241: \catcode`\{=\other
! 8242: \catcode`\}=\other
! 8243: }
! 8244:
! 8245: % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
! 8246: % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
! 8247: % where N is the macro parameter number.
! 8248: % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
! 8249: % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
! 8250: %
! 8251: {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
! 8252: @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
! 8253: @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
! 8254: }
! 8255: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
! 8256:
! 8257: \def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
! 8258:
! 8259: \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
! 8260: \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
! 8261:
! 8262: \def\macroxxx#1{%
! 8263: \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
! 8264: \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
! 8265: \paramno=0\relax
! 8266: \else
! 8267: \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
! 8268: \if\paramno>256\relax
! 8269: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
! 8270: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 8271: \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
! 8272: \fi
! 8273: \fi
! 8274: \fi
! 8275: \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
! 8276: \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
! 8277: \else
! 8278: \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
! 8279: \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
! 8280: \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
! 8281: \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
! 8282: \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
! 8283: \fi
! 8284: \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
! 8285: \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
! 8286: \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
! 8287: \fi}
! 8288:
! 8289: \parseargdef\unmacro{%
! 8290: \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
! 8291: \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
! 8292: \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
! 8293: % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
! 8294: \begingroup
! 8295: \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
! 8296: \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo
! 8297: \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
! 8298: \endgroup
! 8299: \else
! 8300: \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
! 8301: \fi
! 8302: }
! 8303:
! 8304: % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
! 8305: % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
! 8306: %
! 8307: \def\unmacrodo#1{%
! 8308: \ifx #1\relax
! 8309: % remove this
! 8310: \else
! 8311: \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1%
! 8312: \fi
! 8313: }
! 8314:
! 8315: % \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to
! 8316: % the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list.
! 8317: \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
! 8318: \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
! 8319: \def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
! 8320: \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
! 8321: % This made use of the feature that if the last token of a
! 8322: % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
! 8323: % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
! 8324:
! 8325: % Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro.
! 8326: % Set \paramno to the number of arguments,
! 8327: % and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a
! 8328: % three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params
! 8329: % list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are
! 8330: % less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
! 8331: % is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
! 8332: % defined `a la TeX in the macro body.
! 8333: %
! 8334: % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
! 8335: %
! 8336: % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see
! 8337: % \parsemmanyargdef.
! 8338: %
! 8339: \def\parsemargdef#1;{%
! 8340: \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
! 8341: \let\hash\relax
! 8342: % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions
! 8343: \let\xeatspaces\relax
! 8344: \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
! 8345: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
! 8346: \paramno0\relax
! 8347: \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
! 8348: \fi
! 8349: }
! 8350: \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
! 8351: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
! 8352: \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
! 8353: \advance\paramno by 1
! 8354: \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
! 8355: {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
! 8356: \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
! 8357: \fi\next}
! 8358:
! 8359: % \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody
! 8360: %
! 8361: % Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since
! 8362: % rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
! 8363: %
! 8364: % We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro
! 8365: % body to be transformed.
! 8366: % Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro.
! 8367: %
! 8368: {\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{%
! 8369: \xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}%
! 8370: {\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{%
! 8371: \xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}%
! 8372:
! 8373: % Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names.
! 8374: \edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
! 8375: \catcode `@=11\relax
! 8376:
! 8377: %%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
! 8378:
! 8379: % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
! 8380: % hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
! 8381: % processed again to replace the arguments.
! 8382: %
! 8383: % In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
! 8384: % argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
! 8385: % the catcode regime under which the body was input).
! 8386: %
! 8387: % If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
! 8388: % arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error).
! 8389: %
! 8390: % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
! 8391: % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
! 8392: % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
! 8393: % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
! 8394: % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
! 8395: % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
! 8396: \def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
! 8397: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
! 8398: \else
! 8399: \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
! 8400: \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
! 8401: \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
! 8402: \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
! 8403: % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
! 8404: % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an
! 8405: % \xdef .
! 8406: \expandafter\edef\tempa
! 8407: {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
! 8408: \advance\paramno by 1\relax
! 8409: \fi\next}
! 8410:
! 8411:
! 8412: \let\endargs@\relax
! 8413: \let\nil@\relax
! 8414: \def\nilm@{\nil@}%
! 8415: \long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
! 8416:
! 8417: % This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
! 8418: % definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros
! 8419: % macarg.ARGNAME
! 8420: %
! 8421: % #1 is the macro name
! 8422: % #2 is the list of argument names
! 8423: % #3 is the list of argument values
! 8424: \def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
! 8425: \def\macargdeflist@{}%
! 8426: \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
! 8427: \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
! 8428: \def\macroname{#1}%
! 8429: \begingroup
! 8430: \macroargctxt
! 8431: \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
! 8432: \def\@tempa{#3}%
! 8433: \ifx\@tempa\empty
! 8434: \setemptyargvalues@
! 8435: \else
! 8436: \getargvals@@
! 8437: \fi
! 8438: }
! 8439: \def\getargvals@@{%
! 8440: \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
! 8441: % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
! 8442: \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
! 8443: \else
! 8444: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 8445: \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
! 8446: \fi
! 8447: \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
! 8448: \else
! 8449: \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
! 8450: % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg
! 8451: % macros to empty.
! 8452: \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
! 8453: \else
! 8454: % pop current arg name into \@tempb
! 8455: \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
! 8456: \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
! 8457: % pop current argument value into \@tempc
! 8458: \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
! 8459: \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
! 8460: % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
! 8461: % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
! 8462: \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
! 8463: \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
! 8464: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
! 8465: \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
! 8466: \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
! 8467: \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
! 8468: \let\next\getargvals@@
! 8469: \fi
! 8470: \fi
! 8471: \next
! 8472: }
! 8473:
! 8474: \def\push@#1#2{%
! 8475: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
! 8476: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
! 8477: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
! 8478: \expandafter#1#2}%
! 8479: }
! 8480:
! 8481: % Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
! 8482: % in macro \@tempa.
! 8483: %
! 8484: \def\macvalstoargs@{%
! 8485: % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
! 8486: % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
! 8487: % values into respective token registers.
! 8488: %
! 8489: % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
! 8490: \begingroup
! 8491: \paramno0\relax
! 8492: % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
! 8493: % value into a new token list register \toks#N
! 8494: \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
! 8495: % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
! 8496: % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
! 8497: % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
! 8498: \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
! 8499: % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
! 8500: % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
! 8501: % group.
! 8502: \expandafter
! 8503: \endgroup
! 8504: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
! 8505: }
! 8506:
! 8507: % Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group.
! 8508: %
! 8509: \def\macargexpandinbody@{%
! 8510: \expandafter
! 8511: \endgroup
! 8512: \macargdeflist@
! 8513: % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
! 8514: % is in \@tempa .
! 8515: \macvalstoargs@
! 8516: % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
! 8517: % with \@tempb .
! 8518: \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
! 8519: % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
! 8520: % \egroup .
! 8521: \ifx\@tempb\gobble
! 8522: \let\@tempc\relax
! 8523: \else
! 8524: \let\@tempc\egroup
! 8525: \fi
! 8526: % And now we do the real job:
! 8527: \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
! 8528: \@tempd
! 8529: }
! 8530:
! 8531: \def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
! 8532: \if#1;\let\next\relax
! 8533: \else
! 8534: \let\next\putargsintokens@
! 8535: % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
! 8536: % alias \@tempb .
! 8537: \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
! 8538: % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
! 8539: \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
! 8540: \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
! 8541: \advance\paramno by 1\relax
! 8542: \fi
! 8543: \next
! 8544: }
! 8545:
! 8546: % Trailing missing arguments are set to empty.
! 8547: %
! 8548: \def\setemptyargvalues@{%
! 8549: \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
! 8550: \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
! 8551: \else
! 8552: \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
! 8553: \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
! 8554: \fi
! 8555: \next
! 8556: }
! 8557:
! 8558: \def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
! 8559: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
! 8560: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
! 8561: \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
! 8562: \def\paramlist{#2}%
! 8563: }
! 8564:
! 8565: % #1 is the element target macro
! 8566: % #2 is the list macro
! 8567: % #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
! 8568: \def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
! 8569: \def#1{#3}%
! 8570: \def#2{#4}%
! 8571: }
! 8572: \long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
! 8573: \long\def#1{#3}%
! 8574: \long\def#2{#4}%
! 8575: }
! 8576:
! 8577:
! 8578: %%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
! 8579:
! 8580:
! 8581: % This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody.
! 8582: % \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for
! 8583: % its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}".
! 8584: % \paramno is the number of parameters
! 8585: % \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3,"
! 8586: % There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
! 8587: % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
! 8588: % they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group.
! 8589: %
! 8590: \def\defmacro{%
! 8591: \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
! 8592: \ifnum\paramno=1
! 8593: \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}%
! 8594: % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't
! 8595: % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost
! 8596: % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based
! 8597: % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly.
! 8598: \else
! 8599: \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion
! 8600: \fi
! 8601: \ifcase\paramno
! 8602: % 0
! 8603: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 8604: \bgroup
! 8605: \noexpand\spaceisspace
! 8606: \noexpand\endlineisspace
! 8607: \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name.
! 8608: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}%
! 8609: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{%
! 8610: \egroup
! 8611: \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
! 8612: \or % 1
! 8613: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 8614: \bgroup
! 8615: \noexpand\braceorline
! 8616: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}%
! 8617: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
! 8618: \egroup
! 8619: \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}%
! 8620: }%
! 8621: \else % at most 9
! 8622: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax
! 8623: % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument
! 8624: % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a
! 8625: % comma.
! 8626: % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list.
! 8627: % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted.
! 8628: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 8629: \bgroup
! 8630: \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the
! 8631: \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space.
! 8632: \noexpand\expandafter
! 8633: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}%
! 8634: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{%
! 8635: \noexpand\passargtomacro
! 8636: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}%
! 8637: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
! 8638: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}%
! 8639: \expandafter\expandafter
! 8640: \expandafter\xdef
! 8641: \expandafter\expandafter
! 8642: \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{%
! 8643: \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
! 8644: \else % 10 or more:
! 8645: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 8646: \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
! 8647: }%
! 8648: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody
! 8649: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
! 8650: \fi
! 8651: \fi}
! 8652:
! 8653: \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes
! 8654:
! 8655: \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
! 8656:
! 8657:
! 8658: %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
! 8659: %
! 8660: {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape
! 8661: @catcode`@_=11 % private names
! 8662: @catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator
! 8663:
! 8664: % \passargtomacro#1#2 -
! 8665: % Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2
! 8666: % compressed to one.
! 8667: %
! 8668: % This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use
! 8669: % \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where
! 8670: % complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to
! 8671: % an auxiliary file for an index entry).
! 8672: %
! 8673: % State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to
! 8674: % @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is
! 8675: %
! 8676: % THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input)
! 8677: %
! 8678: % where:
! 8679: % THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call
! 8680: % ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro
! 8681: % PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing
! 8682: % NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next
! 8683:
! 8684: @gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{%
! 8685: @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\%
! 8686: }
! 8687: @gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax
! 8688:
! 8689: % #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
! 8690: % #2 - PENDING_BS
! 8691: % #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
! 8692: % #4 used to look ahead
! 8693: %
! 8694: % If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument;
! 8695: % otherwise, remove the next token.
! 8696: @gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{%
! 8697: @ifx#4\%
! 8698: @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish
! 8699: @else
! 8700: @expandafter@add_segment
! 8701: @fi#1!{#2}#4#4%
! 8702: }
! 8703:
! 8704: % #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
! 8705: % #2 - PENDING_BS
! 8706: % #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
! 8707: % #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled.
! 8708: % #5 looks ahead
! 8709: %
! 8710: % Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead.
! 8711: @gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{%
! 8712: @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5%
! 8713: }
! 8714:
! 8715: @gdef@is_fi{@fi}
! 8716:
! 8717: % #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
! 8718: % #2 - PENDING_BS
! 8719: % #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
! 8720: % #4 is input stream until next backslash
! 8721: %
! 8722: % Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a
! 8723: % backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash.
! 8724: % NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish,
! 8725: % finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until
! 8726: % the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent
! 8727: % a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been
! 8728: % added to ARG_RESULT.
! 8729: @gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{%
! 8730: @ifx#3@_finish
! 8731: @call_the_macro#1!%
! 8732: @else
! 8733: % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment
! 8734: @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi
! 8735: % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead.
! 8736: % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how
! 8737: % long #4 is.
! 8738: }
! 8739:
! 8740: % #1 - THE_MACRO
! 8741: % #2 - ARG_RESULT
! 8742: % #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the
! 8743: % conditional.
! 8744: @gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}}
! 8745:
! 8746: }
! 8747: %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
! 8748:
! 8749: % \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks
! 8750: % whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context
! 8751: % for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then,
! 8752: % to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular
! 8753: % \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC.
! 8754: %
! 8755: \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
! 8756: \def\braceorlinexxx{%
! 8757: \ifx\nchar\bgroup
! 8758: \macroargctxt
! 8759: \expandafter\passargtomacro
! 8760: \else
! 8761: \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg
! 8762: \fi \macnamexxx}
! 8763:
! 8764:
! 8765: % @alias.
! 8766: % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
! 8767: % sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
! 8768: %
! 8769: \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
! 8770: \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
! 8771: \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
! 8772: {%
! 8773: \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
! 8774: \addtomacrolist{#1}%
! 8775: \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
! 8776: }%
! 8777: \next
! 8778: }
! 8779:
! 8780:
! 8781: \message{cross references,}
! 8782:
! 8783: \newwrite\auxfile
! 8784: \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
! 8785: \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
! 8786:
! 8787: % @inforef is relatively simple.
! 8788: \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
! 8789: \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
! 8790: \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
! 8791: node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
! 8792:
! 8793: % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
! 8794: % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
! 8795: % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
! 8796: % @node foo , bar , ...
! 8797: % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
! 8798: %
! 8799: \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
! 8800: %
! 8801: % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
! 8802: % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
! 8803: \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
! 8804: \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}\omittopnode}
! 8805:
! 8806: % Used so that the @top node doesn't have to be wrapped in an @ifnottex
! 8807: % conditional.
! 8808: % \doignore goes to more effort to skip nested conditionals but we don't need
! 8809: % that here.
! 8810: \def\omittopnode{%
! 8811: \ifx\lastnode\wordTop
! 8812: \expandafter\ignorenode\fi
! 8813: }
! 8814: \def\wordTop{Top}
! 8815:
! 8816: % Until the next @node or @bye command, divert output to a box that is not
! 8817: % output.
! 8818: \def\ignorenode{\setbox\dummybox\vbox\bgroup\def\node{\egroup\node}%
! 8819: \ignorenodebye
! 8820: }
! 8821:
! 8822: {\let\bye\relax
! 8823: \gdef\ignorenodebye{\let\bye\ignorenodebyedef}
! 8824: \gdef\ignorenodebyedef{\egroup(`Top' node ignored)\bye}}
! 8825: % The redefinition of \bye here is because it is declared \outer
! 8826:
! 8827: \let\lastnode=\empty
! 8828:
! 8829: % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
! 8830: % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
! 8831: %
! 8832: \def\donoderef#1{%
! 8833: \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
! 8834: \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
! 8835: \global\let\lastnode=\empty
! 8836: \fi
! 8837: }
! 8838:
! 8839: % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
! 8840: %
! 8841: \newcount\savesfregister
! 8842: %
! 8843: \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
! 8844: \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
! 8845: \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
! 8846:
! 8847: % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
! 8848: % anchor), which consists of three parts:
! 8849: % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \currentsection,
! 8850: % or the anchor name.
! 8851: % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
! 8852: % empty for anchors.
! 8853: % 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
! 8854: %
! 8855: % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
! 8856: % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
! 8857: % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
! 8858: %
! 8859: \def\setref#1#2{%
! 8860: \pdfmkdest{#1}%
! 8861: \iflinks
! 8862: {%
! 8863: \requireauxfile
! 8864: \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
! 8865: % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX.
! 8866: \def\value##1{##1}%
! 8867: \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
! 8868: \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
! 8869: ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
! 8870: }%
! 8871: \toks0 = \expandafter{\currentsection}%
! 8872: \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
! 8873: \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
! 8874: \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
! 8875: }%
! 8876: \fi
! 8877: }
! 8878:
! 8879: % @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
! 8880: % automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
! 8881: % This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
! 8882: % variable, now it's official.
! 8883: %
! 8884: \parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
! 8885: \def\temp{#1}%
! 8886: \ifx\temp\onword
! 8887: \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
! 8888: = \empty
! 8889: \else\ifx\temp\offword
! 8890: \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
! 8891: = \relax
! 8892: \else
! 8893: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 8894: \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
! 8895: must be on|off}%
! 8896: \fi\fi
! 8897: }
! 8898:
! 8899: %
! 8900: % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
! 8901: % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
! 8902: % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
! 8903: % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
! 8904: %
! 8905: \def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX}
! 8906: \def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX}
! 8907: \def\ref{\xrefXX}
! 8908:
! 8909: \def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX}
! 8910: \def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]}
! 8911: %
! 8912: \newbox\toprefbox
! 8913: \newbox\printedrefnamebox
! 8914: \newbox\infofilenamebox
! 8915: \newbox\printedmanualbox
! 8916: %
! 8917: \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
! 8918: \unsepspaces
! 8919: %
! 8920: % Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
! 8921: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 8922: \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
! 8923: %
! 8924: \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
! 8925: \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
! 8926: %
! 8927: \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
! 8928: \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
! 8929: %
! 8930: % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
! 8931: % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
! 8932: \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
! 8933: % No printed node name was explicitly given.
! 8934: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
! 8935: % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
! 8936: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
! 8937: \else
! 8938: % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
! 8939: % the square brackets if we have it.
! 8940: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
! 8941: % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
! 8942: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
! 8943: \else
! 8944: \ifhavexrefs
! 8945: % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
! 8946: \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
! 8947: \else
! 8948: % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
! 8949: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
! 8950: \fi%
! 8951: \fi
! 8952: \fi
! 8953: \fi
! 8954: %
! 8955: % Make link in pdf output.
! 8956: \ifpdf
! 8957: % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX
! 8958: {\indexnofonts
! 8959: \makevalueexpandable
! 8960: \turnoffactive
! 8961: % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
! 8962: % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in
! 8963: % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
! 8964: \getfilename{#4}%
! 8965: %
! 8966: % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
! 8967: % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
! 8968: \setpdfdestname{#1}%
! 8969: %
! 8970: \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
! 8971: \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets
! 8972: \fi
! 8973: %
! 8974: \leavevmode
! 8975: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
! 8976: \ifnum\filenamelength>0
! 8977: goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}%
! 8978: \else
! 8979: goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}%
! 8980: \fi
! 8981: }%
! 8982: \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
! 8983: \else
! 8984: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 8985: \else
! 8986: % For XeTeX
! 8987: {\indexnofonts
! 8988: \makevalueexpandable
! 8989: \turnoffactive
! 8990: % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
! 8991: % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in
! 8992: % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
! 8993: \getfilename{#4}%
! 8994: %
! 8995: % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
! 8996: % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
! 8997: \setpdfdestname{#1}%
! 8998: %
! 8999: \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
! 9000: \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets
! 9001: \fi
! 9002: %
! 9003: \leavevmode
! 9004: \ifnum\filenamelength>0
! 9005: % With default settings,
! 9006: % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers.
! 9007: % In this case, the replaced destination names of
! 9008: % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement,
! 9009: % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'.
! 9010: % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+),
! 9011: % this command line option is no longer necessary
! 9012: % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special.
! 9013: \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A
! 9014: << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}%
! 9015: \else
! 9016: \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A
! 9017: << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}%
! 9018: \fi
! 9019: }%
! 9020: \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
! 9021: \fi
! 9022: \fi
! 9023: {%
! 9024: % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
! 9025: % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
! 9026: \indexnofonts
! 9027: \turnoffactive
! 9028: \def\value##1{##1}%
! 9029: \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
! 9030: \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
! 9031: }%
! 9032: %
! 9033: % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
! 9034: % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by
! 9035: % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string.
! 9036: \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
! 9037: % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
! 9038: % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
! 9039: \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
! 9040: \refx{#1-snt}{}%
! 9041: \else
! 9042: \printedrefname
! 9043: \fi
! 9044: %
! 9045: % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
! 9046: % "in MANUALNAME".
! 9047: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
! 9048: \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
! 9049: \fi
! 9050: \else
! 9051: % node/anchor (non-float) references.
! 9052: %
! 9053: % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
! 9054: % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
! 9055: % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
! 9056: % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
! 9057: % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name
! 9058: % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
! 9059: %
! 9060: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
! 9061: % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
! 9062: %
! 9063: \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
! 9064: %
! 9065: \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
! 9066: % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
! 9067: % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as
! 9068: % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
! 9069: %
! 9070: \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
! 9071: %
! 9072: \else
! 9073: % Reference within this manual.
! 9074: %
! 9075: % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
! 9076: % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
! 9077: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
! 9078: \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
! 9079: %
! 9080: % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
! 9081: \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
! 9082: %
! 9083: % But we always want a comma and a space:
! 9084: ,\space
! 9085: %
! 9086: % output the `page 3'.
! 9087: \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
! 9088: % Add a , if xref followed by a space
! 9089: \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,%
! 9090: \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB
! 9091: \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @*
! 9092: \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE
! 9093: \else\ifx\
! 9094: \tokenafterxref ,% @NL
! 9095: \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie
! 9096: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 9097: \fi\fi
! 9098: \fi
! 9099: \endlink
! 9100: \endgroup}
! 9101:
! 9102: % Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice).
! 9103: %
! 9104: % Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
! 9105: % missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
! 9106: % "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
! 9107: %
! 9108: % But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
! 9109: % string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
! 9110: % the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
! 9111: % likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
! 9112: % in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
! 9113: %
! 9114: % For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
! 9115: % reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
! 9116: %
! 9117: \def\crossmanualxref#1{%
! 9118: \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
! 9119: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
! 9120: \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty?
! 9121: \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top?
! 9122: \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
! 9123: \fi
! 9124: \fi
! 9125: #1%
! 9126: }
! 9127:
! 9128: % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
! 9129: % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
! 9130: % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
! 9131: % one that Bob is working on :).
! 9132: %
! 9133: \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
! 9134:
! 9135: % Things referred to by \setref.
! 9136: %
! 9137: \def\Ynothing{}
! 9138: \def\Yomitfromtoc{}
! 9139: \def\Ynumbered{%
! 9140: \ifnum\secno=0
! 9141: \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
! 9142: \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
! 9143: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
! 9144: \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
! 9145: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
! 9146: \else
! 9147: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
! 9148: \fi\fi\fi
! 9149: }
! 9150: \def\Yappendix{%
! 9151: \ifnum\secno=0
! 9152: \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
! 9153: \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
! 9154: \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
! 9155: \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
! 9156: \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
! 9157: \else
! 9158: \putwordSection@tie
! 9159: @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
! 9160: \fi\fi\fi
! 9161: }
! 9162:
! 9163: % \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. SUFFIX
! 9164: % is output afterwards if non-empty.
! 9165: \def\refx#1#2{%
! 9166: \requireauxfile
! 9167: {%
! 9168: \indexnofonts
! 9169: \turnoffactive
! 9170: \def\value##1{##1}%
! 9171: \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
! 9172: \csname XR#1\endcsname
! 9173: }%
! 9174: \ifx\thisrefX\relax
! 9175: % If not defined, say something at least.
! 9176: \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
! 9177: \iflinks
! 9178: \ifhavexrefs
! 9179: {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
! 9180: \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
! 9181: \else
! 9182: \ifwarnedxrefs\else
! 9183: \global\warnedxrefstrue
! 9184: \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
! 9185: \fi
! 9186: \fi
! 9187: \fi
! 9188: \else
! 9189: % It's defined, so just use it.
! 9190: \thisrefX
! 9191: \fi
! 9192: #2% Output the suffix in any case.
! 9193: }
! 9194:
! 9195: % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control
! 9196: % sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence
! 9197: % name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float
! 9198: % type, we have more work to do.
! 9199: %
! 9200: \def\xrdef#1#2{%
! 9201: {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences.
! 9202: % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands
! 9203: % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition.
! 9204: \indexnofonts
! 9205: \turnoffactive
! 9206: \def\value##1{##1}%
! 9207: \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
! 9208: }%
! 9209: %
! 9210: \bgroup
! 9211: \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}%
! 9212: \egroup
! 9213: % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on
! 9214: % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with
! 9215: % thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does
! 9216: % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax.
! 9217: %
! 9218: % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
! 9219: \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
! 9220: % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
! 9221: \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
! 9222: \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
! 9223: %
! 9224: % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
! 9225: \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
! 9226: \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
! 9227: \else
! 9228: % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
! 9229: \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
! 9230: \fi
! 9231: %
! 9232: % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
! 9233: % for later use in \listoffloats.
! 9234: \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
! 9235: {\safexrefname}}%
! 9236: \fi
! 9237: }
! 9238:
! 9239: % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
! 9240: % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
! 9241: % This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file.
! 9242: %
! 9243: \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
! 9244: \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
! 9245:
! 9246: % Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it.
! 9247: \def\requireauxfile{%
! 9248: \iflinks
! 9249: \tryauxfile
! 9250: % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
! 9251: \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
! 9252: \fi
! 9253: \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once.
! 9254: }
! 9255:
! 9256: % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
! 9257: %
! 9258: \def\tryauxfile{%
! 9259: \openin 1 \jobname.aux
! 9260: \ifeof 1 \else
! 9261: \readdatafile{aux}%
! 9262: \global\havexrefstrue
! 9263: \fi
! 9264: \closein 1
! 9265: }
! 9266:
! 9267: \def\setupdatafile{%
! 9268: \catcode`\^^@=\other
! 9269: \catcode`\^^A=\other
! 9270: \catcode`\^^B=\other
! 9271: \catcode`\^^C=\other
! 9272: \catcode`\^^D=\other
! 9273: \catcode`\^^E=\other
! 9274: \catcode`\^^F=\other
! 9275: \catcode`\^^G=\other
! 9276: \catcode`\^^H=\other
! 9277: \catcode`\^^K=\other
! 9278: \catcode`\^^L=\other
! 9279: \catcode`\^^N=\other
! 9280: \catcode`\^^P=\other
! 9281: \catcode`\^^Q=\other
! 9282: \catcode`\^^R=\other
! 9283: \catcode`\^^S=\other
! 9284: \catcode`\^^T=\other
! 9285: \catcode`\^^U=\other
! 9286: \catcode`\^^V=\other
! 9287: \catcode`\^^W=\other
! 9288: \catcode`\^^X=\other
! 9289: \catcode`\^^Z=\other
! 9290: \catcode`\^^[=\other
! 9291: \catcode`\^^\=\other
! 9292: \catcode`\^^]=\other
! 9293: \catcode`\^^^=\other
! 9294: \catcode`\^^_=\other
! 9295: \catcode`\^=\other
! 9296: %
! 9297: % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
! 9298: \catcode`\~=\other
! 9299: \catcode`\[=\other
! 9300: \catcode`\]=\other
! 9301: \catcode`\"=\other
! 9302: \catcode`\_=\other
! 9303: \catcode`\|=\other
! 9304: \catcode`\<=\other
! 9305: \catcode`\>=\other
! 9306: \catcode`\$=\other
! 9307: \catcode`\#=\other
! 9308: \catcode`\&=\other
! 9309: \catcode`\%=\other
! 9310: \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
! 9311: %
! 9312: \catcode`\\=\active
! 9313: %
! 9314: % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
! 9315: \catcode`\{=1
! 9316: \catcode`\}=2
! 9317: \catcode`\@=0
! 9318: }
! 9319:
! 9320: \def\readdatafile#1{%
! 9321: \begingroup
! 9322: \setupdatafile
! 9323: \input\jobname.#1
! 9324: \endgroup}
! 9325:
! 9326:
! 9327: \message{insertions,}
! 9328: % including footnotes.
! 9329:
! 9330: \newcount \footnoteno
! 9331:
! 9332: % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
! 9333: % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
! 9334: % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
! 9335: % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
! 9336: % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
! 9337: \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
! 9338:
! 9339: % @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
! 9340: \let\footnotestyle=\comment
! 9341:
! 9342: {\catcode `\@=11
! 9343: %
! 9344: % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
! 9345: \gdef\footnote{%
! 9346: \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
! 9347: \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
! 9348: %
! 9349: % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
! 9350: % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
! 9351: \let\@sf\empty
! 9352: \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
! 9353: %
! 9354: % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
! 9355: \unskip
! 9356: \thisfootno\@sf
! 9357: \dofootnote
! 9358: }%
! 9359:
! 9360: % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
! 9361: % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
! 9362: %
! 9363: % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
! 9364: % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
! 9365: % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
! 9366: %
! 9367: \gdef\dofootnote{%
! 9368: \insert\footins\bgroup
! 9369: %
! 9370: % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot
! 9371: % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.)
! 9372: \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest
! 9373: %
! 9374: % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
! 9375: % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
! 9376: % So reset some parameters.
! 9377: \hsize=\txipagewidth
! 9378: \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
! 9379: \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
! 9380: \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
! 9381: \floatingpenalty\@MM
! 9382: \leftskip\z@skip
! 9383: \rightskip\z@skip
! 9384: \spaceskip\z@skip
! 9385: \xspaceskip\z@skip
! 9386: \parindent\defaultparindent
! 9387: %
! 9388: \smallfonts \rm
! 9389: %
! 9390: % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
! 9391: % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
! 9392: % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
! 9393: % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
! 9394: \let\noindent = \relax
! 9395: %
! 9396: % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
! 9397: % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
! 9398: \everypar = {\hang}%
! 9399: \textindent{\thisfootno}%
! 9400: %
! 9401: % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
! 9402: % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
! 9403: % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
! 9404: \footstrut
! 9405: %
! 9406: % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
! 9407: \futurelet\next\fo@t
! 9408: }
! 9409: }%end \catcode `\@=11
! 9410:
! 9411: \def\errfootnotenest{%
! 9412: \errhelp=\EMsimple
! 9413: \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex,
! 9414: even though they work in makeinfo; sorry}
! 9415: }
! 9416:
! 9417: \def\errfootnoteheading{%
! 9418: \errhelp=\EMsimple
! 9419: \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported}
! 9420: }
! 9421:
! 9422: % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
! 9423: % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
! 9424: % would be lost.
! 9425: % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
! 9426: % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
! 9427: % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
! 9428: %
! 9429: % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
! 9430: % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
! 9431: % out prematurely.
! 9432: %
! 9433: \def\startsavinginserts{%
! 9434: \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
! 9435: \let\insert\saveinsert
! 9436: \else
! 9437: \let\checkinserts\relax
! 9438: \fi
! 9439: }
! 9440:
! 9441: % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
! 9442: % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
! 9443: %
! 9444: \def\saveinsert#1{%
! 9445: \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
! 9446: \afterassignment\next
! 9447: % swallow the left brace
! 9448: \let\temp =
! 9449: }
! 9450: \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
! 9451: \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
! 9452:
! 9453: \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
! 9454:
! 9455: \def\placesaveins#1{%
! 9456: \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
! 9457: {\box#1}%
! 9458: }
! 9459:
! 9460: % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
! 9461: {
! 9462: \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
! 9463: \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
! 9464: }
! 9465:
! 9466: % initialization:
! 9467: \def\newsaveins #1{%
! 9468: \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
! 9469: \next
! 9470: }
! 9471: \def\newsaveinsX #1{%
! 9472: \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
! 9473: \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
! 9474: \checksaveins #1}%
! 9475: }
! 9476:
! 9477: % initialize:
! 9478: \let\checkinserts\empty
! 9479: \newsaveins\footins
! 9480: \newsaveins\margin
! 9481:
! 9482:
! 9483: % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
! 9484: % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
! 9485: %
! 9486: % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
! 9487: % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
! 9488: % undone and the next image would fail.
! 9489: \openin 1 = epsf.tex
! 9490: \ifeof 1 \else
! 9491: % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
! 9492: % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
! 9493: \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
! 9494: \input epsf.tex
! 9495: \fi
! 9496: \closein 1
! 9497: %
! 9498: % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
! 9499: \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
! 9500: \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
! 9501: work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
! 9502: it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.}
! 9503: %
! 9504: \def\image#1{%
! 9505: \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
! 9506: \ifwarnednoepsf \else
! 9507: \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
! 9508: \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
! 9509: \global\warnednoepsftrue
! 9510: \fi
! 9511: \else
! 9512: \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
! 9513: \fi
! 9514: }
! 9515: %
! 9516: % Arguments to @image:
! 9517: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
! 9518: % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
! 9519: % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
! 9520: % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
! 9521: % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
! 9522: \newif\ifimagevmode
! 9523: \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
! 9524: \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
! 9525: \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
! 9526: \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro
! 9527: % If the image is by itself, center it.
! 9528: \ifvmode
! 9529: \imagevmodetrue
! 9530: \else \ifx\centersub\centerV
! 9531: % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
! 9532: \imagevmodetrue
! 9533: \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
! 9534: \fi\fi
! 9535: %
! 9536: \ifimagevmode
! 9537: \nobreak\medskip
! 9538: % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
! 9539: % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
! 9540: % above and below.
! 9541: \nobreak\vskip\parskip
! 9542: \nobreak
! 9543: \fi
! 9544: %
! 9545: % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
! 9546: % environment such as @quotation is respected.
! 9547: % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
! 9548: % normal paragraph indentation.
! 9549: % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
! 9550: % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
! 9551: % eradicate the centering.
! 9552: \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
! 9553: %
! 9554: % Output the image.
! 9555: \ifpdf
! 9556: % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80
! 9557: \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
! 9558: \else
! 9559: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 9560: % For epsf.tex
! 9561: % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
! 9562: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 9563: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
! 9564: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 9565: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
! 9566: \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
! 9567: \else
! 9568: % For XeTeX
! 9569: \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
! 9570: \fi
! 9571: \fi
! 9572: %
! 9573: \ifimagevmode
! 9574: \medskip % space after a standalone image
! 9575: \fi
! 9576: \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
! 9577: \endgroup}
! 9578:
! 9579:
! 9580: % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
! 9581: % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
! 9582: % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
! 9583: %
! 9584: \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
! 9585:
! 9586: % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
! 9587: \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
! 9588:
! 9589: % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
! 9590: % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
! 9591: % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
! 9592: %
! 9593: % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
! 9594: % be referable.
! 9595: %
! 9596: % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
! 9597: % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
! 9598: %
! 9599: % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
! 9600: % chapter-level command.
! 9601: \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
! 9602: %
! 9603: \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
! 9604: \let\thiscaption=\empty
! 9605: \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
! 9606: %
! 9607: % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
! 9608: %
! 9609: % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
! 9610: % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
! 9611: %
! 9612: \startsavinginserts
! 9613: %
! 9614: % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
! 9615: \par
! 9616: %
! 9617: \vtop\bgroup
! 9618: \def\floattype{#1}%
! 9619: \def\floatlabel{#2}%
! 9620: \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
! 9621: %
! 9622: \ifx\floattype\empty
! 9623: \let\safefloattype=\empty
! 9624: \else
! 9625: {%
! 9626: % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
! 9627: % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
! 9628: \indexnofonts
! 9629: \turnoffactive
! 9630: \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
! 9631: }%
! 9632: \fi
! 9633: %
! 9634: % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
! 9635: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
! 9636: % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
! 9637: % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
! 9638: %
! 9639: \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
! 9640: \global\advance\floatno by 1
! 9641: %
! 9642: {%
! 9643: % This magic value for \currentsection is output by \setref as the
! 9644: % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
! 9645: % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
! 9646: % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
! 9647: % lists of floats.
! 9648: %
! 9649: \edef\currentsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
! 9650: \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
! 9651: }%
! 9652: \fi
! 9653: %
! 9654: % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
! 9655: \vskip\parskip
! 9656: %
! 9657: % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
! 9658: \restorefirstparagraphindent
! 9659: }
! 9660:
! 9661: % we have these possibilities:
! 9662: % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
! 9663: % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
! 9664: % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
! 9665: % @float Foo & no caption: Foo
! 9666: % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
! 9667: % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
! 9668: % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
! 9669: % @float & no caption:
! 9670: %
! 9671: \def\Efloat{%
! 9672: \let\floatident = \empty
! 9673: %
! 9674: % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
! 9675: \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
! 9676: %
! 9677: % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
! 9678: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
! 9679: \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
! 9680: \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
! 9681: \fi
! 9682: % the number.
! 9683: \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
! 9684: \fi
! 9685: %
! 9686: % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
! 9687: % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
! 9688: \let\captionline = \floatident
! 9689: %
! 9690: \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
! 9691: \ifx\floatident\empty \else
! 9692: \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
! 9693: \fi
! 9694: %
! 9695: % caption text.
! 9696: \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
! 9697: \fi
! 9698: %
! 9699: % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
! 9700: % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
! 9701: \ifx\captionline\empty \else
! 9702: \vskip.5\parskip
! 9703: \captionline
! 9704: %
! 9705: % Space below caption.
! 9706: \vskip\parskip
! 9707: \fi
! 9708: %
! 9709: % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
! 9710: % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
! 9711: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
! 9712: % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
! 9713: % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
! 9714: % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
! 9715: {%
! 9716: \requireauxfile
! 9717: \atdummies
! 9718: %
! 9719: \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
! 9720: \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}%
! 9721: \else
! 9722: \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}%
! 9723: \fi
! 9724: \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
! 9725: \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
! 9726: }%
! 9727: \fi
! 9728: \egroup % end of \vtop
! 9729: %
! 9730: \checkinserts
! 9731: }
! 9732:
! 9733: % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
! 9734: %
! 9735: \def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
! 9736: \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
! 9737: }
! 9738:
! 9739: % @caption, @shortcaption
! 9740: %
! 9741: \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
! 9742: \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
! 9743: \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
! 9744: \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
! 9745:
! 9746: % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
! 9747: % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
! 9748: \def\getfloatno#1{%
! 9749: \ifx#1\relax
! 9750: % Haven't seen this figure type before.
! 9751: \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
! 9752: %
! 9753: % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
! 9754: \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
! 9755: \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
! 9756: \fi
! 9757: \let\floatno#1%
! 9758: }
! 9759:
! 9760: % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
! 9761: % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
! 9762: % first read the @float command.
! 9763: %
! 9764: \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
! 9765:
! 9766: % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
! 9767: % distinguish floats from other xref types.
! 9768: \def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
! 9769:
! 9770: % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
! 9771: % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
! 9772: % \currentsection value which we \setref above.
! 9773: %
! 9774: \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
! 9775: %
! 9776: % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
! 9777: % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
! 9778: %
! 9779: \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
! 9780: \def\temp{#1}%
! 9781: \def\iffloattype{#2}%
! 9782: \ifx\temp\floatmagic
! 9783: }
! 9784:
! 9785: % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
! 9786: %
! 9787: \parseargdef\listoffloats{%
! 9788: \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
! 9789: {%
! 9790: % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
! 9791: % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
! 9792: \indexnofonts
! 9793: \turnoffactive
! 9794: \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
! 9795: }%
! 9796: %
! 9797: % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
! 9798: \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
! 9799: \ifhavexrefs
! 9800: % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
! 9801: \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
! 9802: \fi
! 9803: \else
! 9804: \begingroup
! 9805: \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
! 9806: \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
! 9807: \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
! 9808: \endgroup
! 9809: \fi
! 9810: }
! 9811:
! 9812: % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
! 9813: % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
! 9814: % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
! 9815: % has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
! 9816: %
! 9817: % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
! 9818: % they won't appear in the aux file).
! 9819: %
! 9820: \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
! 9821: \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
! 9822: % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
! 9823: % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
! 9824: % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
! 9825: % in pdf output.
! 9826: \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
! 9827: %
! 9828: % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
! 9829: \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
! 9830: \writeentry
! 9831: }}
! 9832:
! 9833:
! 9834: \message{localization,}
! 9835:
! 9836: % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
! 9837: % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
! 9838: % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
! 9839: %
! 9840: {
! 9841: \catcode`\_ = \active
! 9842: \globaldefs=1
! 9843: \parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
! 9844: \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
! 9845: % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
! 9846: \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test
! 9847: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
! 9848: \ifeof 1
! 9849: \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish
! 9850: \else
! 9851: \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
! 9852: \input txi-#1.tex
! 9853: \fi
! 9854: \closein 1
! 9855: \endgroup % end raw TeX
! 9856: }
! 9857: %
! 9858: % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
! 9859: % try txi-de.tex.
! 9860: %
! 9861: \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
! 9862: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
! 9863: \ifeof 1
! 9864: \errhelp = \nolanghelp
! 9865: \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
! 9866: \else
! 9867: \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
! 9868: \input txi-#1.tex
! 9869: \fi
! 9870: \closein 1
! 9871: }
! 9872: }% end of special _ catcode
! 9873: %
! 9874: \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
! 9875: is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
! 9876: directory should work if nowhere else does.}
! 9877:
! 9878: % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
! 9879: % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
! 9880: % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
! 9881: %
! 9882: % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
! 9883: % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
! 9884: % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
! 9885: %
! 9886: % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
! 9887: % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
! 9888: % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
! 9889: % accented characters problem.)
! 9890: %
! 9891: \catcode`@=11
! 9892: \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
! 9893: % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
! 9894: \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
! 9895: \message{no patterns for #1}%
! 9896: \else
! 9897: \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
! 9898: \fi
! 9899: % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
! 9900: \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
! 9901: \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
! 9902: }
! 9903:
! 9904: % XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively.
! 9905: % Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation.
! 9906: % Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise.
! 9907: %
! 9908: \newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 9909: \newif\iftxiusebytewiseio
! 9910:
! 9911: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 9912: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
! 9913: \txinativeunicodecapablefalse
! 9914: \txiusebytewiseiotrue
! 9915: \else
! 9916: \txinativeunicodecapabletrue
! 9917: \txiusebytewiseiofalse
! 9918: \fi
! 9919: \else
! 9920: \txinativeunicodecapabletrue
! 9921: \txiusebytewiseiofalse
! 9922: \fi
! 9923:
! 9924: % Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex
! 9925: % for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings.
! 9926: %
! 9927: \def\setbytewiseio{%
! 9928: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 9929: \else
! 9930: \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read
! 9931: \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file
! 9932: % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for
! 9933: % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files.
! 9934: % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in
! 9935: % place of non-ASCII characters.
! 9936: \fi
! 9937:
! 9938: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
! 9939: \else
! 9940: \directlua{
! 9941: local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub
! 9942: local function convert_char (char)
! 9943: return utf8_char(byte(char))
! 9944: end
! 9945:
! 9946: local function convert_line (line)
! 9947: return gsub(line, ".", convert_char)
! 9948: end
! 9949:
! 9950: callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line)
! 9951:
! 9952: local function convert_line_out (line)
! 9953: local line_out = ""
! 9954: for c in string.utfvalues(line) do
! 9955: line_out = line_out .. string.char(c)
! 9956: end
! 9957: return line_out
! 9958: end
! 9959:
! 9960: callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out)
! 9961: }
! 9962: \fi
! 9963:
! 9964: \txiusebytewiseiotrue
! 9965: }
! 9966:
! 9967:
! 9968: % Helpers for encodings.
! 9969: % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
! 9970: %
! 9971: \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
! 9972: \count255=128
! 9973: \loop\ifnum\count255<256
! 9974: \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
! 9975: \advance\count255 by 1
! 9976: \repeat
! 9977: }
! 9978:
! 9979: \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
! 9980: \count255=128
! 9981: \loop\ifnum\count255<256
! 9982: \catcode\count255=#1\relax
! 9983: \advance\count255 by 1
! 9984: \repeat
! 9985: }
! 9986:
! 9987: % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
! 9988: % according to the specified encoding.
! 9989: %
! 9990: \def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz}
! 9991: \def\documentencodingzzz#1{%
! 9992: %
! 9993: % Encoding being declared for the document.
! 9994: \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
! 9995: %
! 9996: % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
! 9997: % to compare them with \ifx.
! 9998: \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
! 9999: \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
! 10000: \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
! 10001: \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
! 10002: \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
! 10003: %
! 10004: \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
! 10005: \asciichardefs
! 10006: %
! 10007: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
! 10008: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 10009: \setbytewiseio
! 10010: \fi
! 10011: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 10012: \lattwochardefs
! 10013: %
! 10014: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
! 10015: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 10016: \setbytewiseio
! 10017: \fi
! 10018: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 10019: \latonechardefs
! 10020: %
! 10021: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
! 10022: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 10023: \setbytewiseio
! 10024: \fi
! 10025: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 10026: \latninechardefs
! 10027: %
! 10028: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
! 10029: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 10030: % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX)
! 10031: \nativeunicodechardefs
! 10032: \else
! 10033: % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX)
! 10034: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 10035: % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level
! 10036: % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated
! 10037: % definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is
! 10038: % sufficient.
! 10039: \fi
! 10040: %
! 10041: \else
! 10042: \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}%
! 10043: %
! 10044: \fi % utfeight
! 10045: \fi % latnine
! 10046: \fi % latone
! 10047: \fi % lattwo
! 10048: \fi % ascii
! 10049: %
! 10050: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 10051: \else
! 10052: \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
! 10053: \else
! 10054: \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
! 10055: \else
! 10056: \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle %
! 10057: non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}%
! 10058: \fi
! 10059: \fi
! 10060: \fi
! 10061: }
! 10062:
! 10063: % emacs-page
! 10064: % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
! 10065: % the default font encoding (OT1).
! 10066: %
! 10067: \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}}
! 10068:
! 10069: % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
! 10070: \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
! 10071:
! 10072: % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
! 10073: % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
! 10074: % macros containing the character definitions.
! 10075: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
! 10076: %
! 10077:
! 10078: \def\gdefchar#1#2{%
! 10079: \gdef#1{%
! 10080: \ifpassthroughchars
! 10081: \string#1%
! 10082: \else
! 10083: #2%
! 10084: \fi
! 10085: }}
! 10086:
! 10087: % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
! 10088: \def\latonechardefs{%
! 10089: \gdefchar^^a0{\tie}
! 10090: \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown}
! 10091: \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent
! 10092: \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}}
! 10093: \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency
! 10094: \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen
! 10095: \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar
! 10096: \gdefchar^^a7{\S}
! 10097: \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}}
! 10098: \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}}
! 10099: \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf}
! 10100: \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}}
! 10101: \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot}
! 10102: \gdefchar^^ad{\-}
! 10103: \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}}
! 10104: \gdefchar^^af{\={}}
! 10105: %
! 10106: \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree}
! 10107: \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$}
! 10108: \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$}
! 10109: \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$}
! 10110: \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}}
! 10111: \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$}
! 10112: \gdefchar^^b6{\P}
! 10113: \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot}
! 10114: \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ }
! 10115: \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$}
! 10116: \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm}
! 10117: \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}}
! 10118: \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$}
! 10119: \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$}
! 10120: \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$}
! 10121: \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown}
! 10122: %
! 10123: \gdefchar^^c0{\`A}
! 10124: \gdefchar^^c1{\'A}
! 10125: \gdefchar^^c2{\^A}
! 10126: \gdefchar^^c3{\~A}
! 10127: \gdefchar^^c4{\"A}
! 10128: \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A}
! 10129: \gdefchar^^c6{\AE}
! 10130: \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C}
! 10131: \gdefchar^^c8{\`E}
! 10132: \gdefchar^^c9{\'E}
! 10133: \gdefchar^^ca{\^E}
! 10134: \gdefchar^^cb{\"E}
! 10135: \gdefchar^^cc{\`I}
! 10136: \gdefchar^^cd{\'I}
! 10137: \gdefchar^^ce{\^I}
! 10138: \gdefchar^^cf{\"I}
! 10139: %
! 10140: \gdefchar^^d0{\DH}
! 10141: \gdefchar^^d1{\~N}
! 10142: \gdefchar^^d2{\`O}
! 10143: \gdefchar^^d3{\'O}
! 10144: \gdefchar^^d4{\^O}
! 10145: \gdefchar^^d5{\~O}
! 10146: \gdefchar^^d6{\"O}
! 10147: \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$}
! 10148: \gdefchar^^d8{\O}
! 10149: \gdefchar^^d9{\`U}
! 10150: \gdefchar^^da{\'U}
! 10151: \gdefchar^^db{\^U}
! 10152: \gdefchar^^dc{\"U}
! 10153: \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y}
! 10154: \gdefchar^^de{\TH}
! 10155: \gdefchar^^df{\ss}
! 10156: %
! 10157: \gdefchar^^e0{\`a}
! 10158: \gdefchar^^e1{\'a}
! 10159: \gdefchar^^e2{\^a}
! 10160: \gdefchar^^e3{\~a}
! 10161: \gdefchar^^e4{\"a}
! 10162: \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a}
! 10163: \gdefchar^^e6{\ae}
! 10164: \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c}
! 10165: \gdefchar^^e8{\`e}
! 10166: \gdefchar^^e9{\'e}
! 10167: \gdefchar^^ea{\^e}
! 10168: \gdefchar^^eb{\"e}
! 10169: \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
! 10170: \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
! 10171: \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
! 10172: \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
! 10173: %
! 10174: \gdefchar^^f0{\dh}
! 10175: \gdefchar^^f1{\~n}
! 10176: \gdefchar^^f2{\`o}
! 10177: \gdefchar^^f3{\'o}
! 10178: \gdefchar^^f4{\^o}
! 10179: \gdefchar^^f5{\~o}
! 10180: \gdefchar^^f6{\"o}
! 10181: \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$}
! 10182: \gdefchar^^f8{\o}
! 10183: \gdefchar^^f9{\`u}
! 10184: \gdefchar^^fa{\'u}
! 10185: \gdefchar^^fb{\^u}
! 10186: \gdefchar^^fc{\"u}
! 10187: \gdefchar^^fd{\'y}
! 10188: \gdefchar^^fe{\th}
! 10189: \gdefchar^^ff{\"y}
! 10190: }
! 10191:
! 10192: % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
! 10193: \def\latninechardefs{%
! 10194: % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
! 10195: \latonechardefs
! 10196: %
! 10197: \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}}
! 10198: \gdefchar^^a6{\v S}
! 10199: \gdefchar^^a8{\v s}
! 10200: \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z}
! 10201: \gdefchar^^b8{\v z}
! 10202: \gdefchar^^bc{\OE}
! 10203: \gdefchar^^bd{\oe}
! 10204: \gdefchar^^be{\"Y}
! 10205: }
! 10206:
! 10207: % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
! 10208: \def\lattwochardefs{%
! 10209: \gdefchar^^a0{\tie}
! 10210: \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
! 10211: \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}}
! 10212: \gdefchar^^a3{\L}
! 10213: \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
! 10214: \gdefchar^^a5{\v L}
! 10215: \gdefchar^^a6{\'S}
! 10216: \gdefchar^^a7{\S}
! 10217: \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}}
! 10218: \gdefchar^^a9{\v S}
! 10219: \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S}
! 10220: \gdefchar^^ab{\v T}
! 10221: \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z}
! 10222: \gdefchar^^ad{\-}
! 10223: \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z}
! 10224: \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z}
! 10225: %
! 10226: \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}}
! 10227: \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
! 10228: \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
! 10229: \gdefchar^^b3{\l}
! 10230: \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}}
! 10231: \gdefchar^^b5{\v l}
! 10232: \gdefchar^^b6{\'s}
! 10233: \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}}
! 10234: \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ }
! 10235: \gdefchar^^b9{\v s}
! 10236: \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s}
! 10237: \gdefchar^^bb{\v t}
! 10238: \gdefchar^^bc{\'z}
! 10239: \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}}
! 10240: \gdefchar^^be{\v z}
! 10241: \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z}
! 10242: %
! 10243: \gdefchar^^c0{\'R}
! 10244: \gdefchar^^c1{\'A}
! 10245: \gdefchar^^c2{\^A}
! 10246: \gdefchar^^c3{\u A}
! 10247: \gdefchar^^c4{\"A}
! 10248: \gdefchar^^c5{\'L}
! 10249: \gdefchar^^c6{\'C}
! 10250: \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C}
! 10251: \gdefchar^^c8{\v C}
! 10252: \gdefchar^^c9{\'E}
! 10253: \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
! 10254: \gdefchar^^cb{\"E}
! 10255: \gdefchar^^cc{\v E}
! 10256: \gdefchar^^cd{\'I}
! 10257: \gdefchar^^ce{\^I}
! 10258: \gdefchar^^cf{\v D}
! 10259: %
! 10260: \gdefchar^^d0{\DH}
! 10261: \gdefchar^^d1{\'N}
! 10262: \gdefchar^^d2{\v N}
! 10263: \gdefchar^^d3{\'O}
! 10264: \gdefchar^^d4{\^O}
! 10265: \gdefchar^^d5{\H O}
! 10266: \gdefchar^^d6{\"O}
! 10267: \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$}
! 10268: \gdefchar^^d8{\v R}
! 10269: \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U}
! 10270: \gdefchar^^da{\'U}
! 10271: \gdefchar^^db{\H U}
! 10272: \gdefchar^^dc{\"U}
! 10273: \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y}
! 10274: \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T}
! 10275: \gdefchar^^df{\ss}
! 10276: %
! 10277: \gdefchar^^e0{\'r}
! 10278: \gdefchar^^e1{\'a}
! 10279: \gdefchar^^e2{\^a}
! 10280: \gdefchar^^e3{\u a}
! 10281: \gdefchar^^e4{\"a}
! 10282: \gdefchar^^e5{\'l}
! 10283: \gdefchar^^e6{\'c}
! 10284: \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c}
! 10285: \gdefchar^^e8{\v c}
! 10286: \gdefchar^^e9{\'e}
! 10287: \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
! 10288: \gdefchar^^eb{\"e}
! 10289: \gdefchar^^ec{\v e}
! 10290: \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
! 10291: \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
! 10292: \gdefchar^^ef{\v d}
! 10293: %
! 10294: \gdefchar^^f0{\dh}
! 10295: \gdefchar^^f1{\'n}
! 10296: \gdefchar^^f2{\v n}
! 10297: \gdefchar^^f3{\'o}
! 10298: \gdefchar^^f4{\^o}
! 10299: \gdefchar^^f5{\H o}
! 10300: \gdefchar^^f6{\"o}
! 10301: \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$}
! 10302: \gdefchar^^f8{\v r}
! 10303: \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u}
! 10304: \gdefchar^^fa{\'u}
! 10305: \gdefchar^^fb{\H u}
! 10306: \gdefchar^^fc{\"u}
! 10307: \gdefchar^^fd{\'y}
! 10308: \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t}
! 10309: \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
! 10310: }
! 10311:
! 10312: % UTF-8 character definitions.
! 10313: %
! 10314: % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
! 10315: % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
! 10316: % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
! 10317: %
! 10318: \newcount\countUTFx
! 10319: \newcount\countUTFy
! 10320: \newcount\countUTFz
! 10321:
! 10322: \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
! 10323: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
! 10324: %
! 10325: \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
! 10326: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
! 10327: %
! 10328: \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
! 10329: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
! 10330:
! 10331: \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
! 10332: \ifx #1\relax
! 10333: \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
! 10334: \else
! 10335: \expandafter #1%
! 10336: \fi
! 10337: }
! 10338:
! 10339: % Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences
! 10340: \begingroup
! 10341: \catcode`\~13
! 10342: \catcode`\$12
! 10343: \catcode`\"12
! 10344:
! 10345: % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp
! 10346: % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value.
! 10347: \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
! 10348: \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
! 10349: \uccode`\~\countUTFx
! 10350: \uccode`\$\countUTFx
! 10351: \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
! 10352: \advance\countUTFx by 1
! 10353: \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
! 10354: \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
! 10355: \fi}
! 10356:
! 10357: % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to
! 10358: % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files.
! 10359: \countUTFx = "80
! 10360: \countUTFy = "C2
! 10361: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
! 10362: \gdef~{%
! 10363: \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}%
! 10364: \UTFviiiLoop
! 10365:
! 10366: \countUTFx = "C2
! 10367: \countUTFy = "E0
! 10368: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
! 10369: \gdef~{%
! 10370: \ifpassthroughchars $%
! 10371: \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}%
! 10372: \UTFviiiLoop
! 10373:
! 10374: \countUTFx = "E0
! 10375: \countUTFy = "F0
! 10376: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
! 10377: \gdef~{%
! 10378: \ifpassthroughchars $%
! 10379: \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}%
! 10380: \UTFviiiLoop
! 10381:
! 10382: \countUTFx = "F0
! 10383: \countUTFy = "F4
! 10384: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
! 10385: \gdef~{%
! 10386: \ifpassthroughchars $%
! 10387: \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi
! 10388: }}%
! 10389: \UTFviiiLoop
! 10390: \endgroup
! 10391:
! 10392: \def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below
! 10393:
! 10394: % @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it.
! 10395: \def\U#1{%
! 10396: \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax
! 10397: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 10398: % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is
! 10399: % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph,
! 10400: % letters are missing.
! 10401: \begingroup
! 10402: \uccode`\.="#1\relax
! 10403: \uppercase{.}
! 10404: \endgroup
! 10405: \else
! 10406: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 10407: \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}%
! 10408: \fi
! 10409: \else
! 10410: \csname uni:#1\endcsname
! 10411: \fi
! 10412: }
! 10413:
! 10414: % These macros are used here to construct the name of a control
! 10415: % sequence to be defined.
! 10416: \def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{%
! 10417: \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}%
! 10418: \def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{%
! 10419: \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}%
! 10420: \def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{%
! 10421: \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}%
! 10422:
! 10423: % For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX),
! 10424: % provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character;
! 10425: % this gets used by the @U command
! 10426: %
! 10427: \begingroup
! 10428: \catcode`\"=12
! 10429: \catcode`\<=12
! 10430: \catcode`\.=12
! 10431: \catcode`\,=12
! 10432: \catcode`\;=12
! 10433: \catcode`\!=12
! 10434: \catcode`\~=13
! 10435: \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{%
! 10436: \countUTFz = "#1\relax
! 10437: \begingroup
! 10438: \parseXMLCharref
! 10439:
! 10440: % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's
! 10441: % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g.
! 10442: %
! 10443: % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2
! 10444: % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname
! 10445: % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token)
! 10446: %
! 10447: \expandafter\expandafter
! 10448: \expandafter\expandafter
! 10449: \expandafter\expandafter
! 10450: \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
! 10451: %
! 10452: \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else
! 10453: \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}%
! 10454: \fi
! 10455: %
! 10456: % define an additional control sequence for this code point.
! 10457: \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp
! 10458: \endgroup}
! 10459: %
! 10460: % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp
! 10461: % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence.
! 10462: \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
! 10463: \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
! 10464: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 10465: \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
! 10466: \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
! 10467: \parseUTFviiiA,%
! 10468: \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,%
! 10469: \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
! 10470: \parseUTFviiiA;%
! 10471: \parseUTFviiiA,%
! 10472: \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}%
! 10473: \else
! 10474: \parseUTFviiiA;%
! 10475: \parseUTFviiiA,%
! 10476: \parseUTFviiiA!%
! 10477: \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}%
! 10478: \fi\fi\fi
! 10479: }
! 10480:
! 10481: % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx.
! 10482: % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence.
! 10483: % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one
! 10484: % of the bytes.
! 10485: \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
! 10486: \countUTFx = \countUTFz
! 10487: \divide\countUTFz by 64
! 10488: \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz.
! 10489: \multiply\countUTFz by 64
! 10490:
! 10491: % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract
! 10492: % in order to get the last five bits.
! 10493: \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
! 10494:
! 10495: % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence.
! 10496: \advance\countUTFx by 128
! 10497: \uccode `#1\countUTFx
! 10498: \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
! 10499:
! 10500: % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp
! 10501: % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8
! 10502: % sequence.
! 10503: % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros.
! 10504: % #3 is always a full stop (.)
! 10505: % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these
! 10506: % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's.
! 10507: \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
! 10508: \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
! 10509: \uccode `#3\countUTFz
! 10510: \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
! 10511: \endgroup
! 10512:
! 10513: % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
! 10514: % provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally
! 10515: %
! 10516: \def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{%
! 10517: \catcode"#1=\other
! 10518: }
! 10519:
! 10520: % https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M
! 10521: % U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block)
! 10522: % U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block)
! 10523: % U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A
! 10524: % U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B
! 10525: %
! 10526: % Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing
! 10527: % characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts
! 10528: % awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without
! 10529: % reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years,
! 10530: % plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else.
! 10531: % We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at
! 10532: % least make most of the characters not bomb out.
! 10533: %
! 10534: \def\unicodechardefs{%
! 10535: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}%
! 10536: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}%
! 10537: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent
! 10538: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}%
! 10539: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency
! 10540: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen
! 10541: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar
! 10542: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}%
! 10543: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}%
! 10544: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}%
! 10545: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}%
! 10546: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}%
! 10547: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}%
! 10548: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}%
! 10549: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}%
! 10550: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}%
! 10551: %
! 10552: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}%
! 10553: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}%
! 10554: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}%
! 10555: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}%
! 10556: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}%
! 10557: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}%
! 10558: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}%
! 10559: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}%
! 10560: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}%
! 10561: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}%
! 10562: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}%
! 10563: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}%
! 10564: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}%
! 10565: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}%
! 10566: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}%
! 10567: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}%
! 10568: %
! 10569: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}%
! 10570: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}%
! 10571: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}%
! 10572: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}%
! 10573: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}%
! 10574: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}%
! 10575: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}%
! 10576: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}%
! 10577: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}%
! 10578: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}%
! 10579: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}%
! 10580: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}%
! 10581: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}%
! 10582: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}%
! 10583: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}%
! 10584: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}%
! 10585: %
! 10586: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}%
! 10587: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}%
! 10588: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}%
! 10589: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}%
! 10590: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}%
! 10591: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}%
! 10592: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}%
! 10593: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}%
! 10594: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}%
! 10595: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}%
! 10596: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}%
! 10597: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}%
! 10598: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}%
! 10599: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}%
! 10600: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}%
! 10601: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}%
! 10602: %
! 10603: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}%
! 10604: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}%
! 10605: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}%
! 10606: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}%
! 10607: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}%
! 10608: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}%
! 10609: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}%
! 10610: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}%
! 10611: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}%
! 10612: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}%
! 10613: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}%
! 10614: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}%
! 10615: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10616: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10617: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10618: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10619: %
! 10620: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}%
! 10621: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}%
! 10622: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}%
! 10623: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}%
! 10624: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}%
! 10625: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}%
! 10626: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}%
! 10627: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}%
! 10628: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}%
! 10629: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}%
! 10630: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}%
! 10631: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}%
! 10632: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}%
! 10633: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}%
! 10634: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}%
! 10635: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}%
! 10636: %
! 10637: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}%
! 10638: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}%
! 10639: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}%
! 10640: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}%
! 10641: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}%
! 10642: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}%
! 10643: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}%
! 10644: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}%
! 10645: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}%
! 10646: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}%
! 10647: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}%
! 10648: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}%
! 10649: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}%
! 10650: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}%
! 10651: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}%
! 10652: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}%
! 10653: %
! 10654: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}%
! 10655: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}%
! 10656: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}%
! 10657: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}%
! 10658: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}%
! 10659: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}%
! 10660: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}%
! 10661: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}%
! 10662: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}%
! 10663: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}%
! 10664: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}%
! 10665: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}%
! 10666: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}%
! 10667: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}%
! 10668: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}%
! 10669: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}%
! 10670: %
! 10671: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}%
! 10672: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}%
! 10673: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}%
! 10674: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}%
! 10675: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}%
! 10676: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}%
! 10677: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}%
! 10678: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}%
! 10679: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}%
! 10680: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10681: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}%
! 10682: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}%
! 10683: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}%
! 10684: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10685: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}%
! 10686: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}%
! 10687: %
! 10688: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}%
! 10689: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}%
! 10690: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}%
! 10691: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}%
! 10692: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}%
! 10693: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}%
! 10694: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}%
! 10695: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}%
! 10696: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}%
! 10697: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}%
! 10698: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}%
! 10699: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}%
! 10700: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}%
! 10701: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern
! 10702: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern
! 10703: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}%
! 10704: %
! 10705: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}%
! 10706: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}%
! 10707: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}%
! 10708: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}%
! 10709: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}%
! 10710: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}%
! 10711: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}%
! 10712: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}%
! 10713: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}%
! 10714: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}%
! 10715: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}%
! 10716: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}%
! 10717: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}%
! 10718: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}%
! 10719: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}%
! 10720: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}%
! 10721: %
! 10722: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}%
! 10723: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}%
! 10724: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}%
! 10725: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}%
! 10726: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}%
! 10727: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}%
! 10728: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}%
! 10729: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}%
! 10730: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}%
! 10731: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}%
! 10732: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}%
! 10733: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}%
! 10734: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}%
! 10735: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}%
! 10736: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}%
! 10737: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}%
! 10738: %
! 10739: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}%
! 10740: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}%
! 10741: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}%
! 10742: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}%
! 10743: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}%
! 10744: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}%
! 10745: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}%
! 10746: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}%
! 10747: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}%
! 10748: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}%
! 10749: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}%
! 10750: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}%
! 10751: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}%
! 10752: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}%
! 10753: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}%
! 10754: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}%
! 10755: %
! 10756: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}%
! 10757: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}%
! 10758: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}%
! 10759: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}%
! 10760: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}%
! 10761: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}%
! 10762: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}%
! 10763: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}%
! 10764: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}%
! 10765: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}%
! 10766: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}%
! 10767: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}%
! 10768: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}%
! 10769: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}%
! 10770: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}%
! 10771: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}%
! 10772: %
! 10773: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}%
! 10774: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}%
! 10775: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}%
! 10776: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}%
! 10777: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}%
! 10778: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}%
! 10779: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}%
! 10780: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}%
! 10781: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}%
! 10782: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}%
! 10783: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}%
! 10784: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}%
! 10785: %
! 10786: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}%
! 10787: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}%
! 10788: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}%
! 10789: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}%
! 10790: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}%
! 10791: %
! 10792: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}%
! 10793: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}%
! 10794: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}%
! 10795: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}%
! 10796: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}%
! 10797: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}%
! 10798: %
! 10799: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}%
! 10800: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}%
! 10801: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}%
! 10802: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}%
! 10803: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}%
! 10804: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}%
! 10805: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}%
! 10806: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}%
! 10807: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}%
! 10808: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}%
! 10809: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}%
! 10810: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}%
! 10811: %
! 10812: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}%
! 10813: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}%
! 10814: %
! 10815: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}%
! 10816: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}%
! 10817: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}%
! 10818: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}%
! 10819: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}%
! 10820: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}%
! 10821: %
! 10822: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}%
! 10823: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}%
! 10824: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}%
! 10825: %
! 10826: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02BC}{'}%
! 10827: %
! 10828: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}%
! 10829: %
! 10830: % Greek letters upper case
! 10831: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}%
! 10832: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}%
! 10833: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}%
! 10834: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}%
! 10835: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}%
! 10836: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}%
! 10837: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}%
! 10838: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}%
! 10839: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}%
! 10840: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}%
! 10841: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}%
! 10842: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}%
! 10843: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}%
! 10844: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}%
! 10845: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}%
! 10846: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}%
! 10847: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}%
! 10848: %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma
! 10849: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}%
! 10850: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}%
! 10851: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}%
! 10852: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}%
! 10853: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}%
! 10854: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}%
! 10855: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}%
! 10856: %
! 10857: % Vowels with accents
! 10858: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}%
! 10859: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}%
! 10860: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}%
! 10861: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}%
! 10862: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}%
! 10863: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}%
! 10864: %
! 10865: % Standalone accent
! 10866: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}%
! 10867: %
! 10868: % Greek letters lower case
! 10869: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}%
! 10870: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}%
! 10871: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}%
! 10872: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}%
! 10873: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}%
! 10874: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}%
! 10875: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}%
! 10876: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}%
! 10877: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}%
! 10878: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}%
! 10879: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}%
! 10880: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}%
! 10881: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}%
! 10882: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}%
! 10883: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron
! 10884: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}%
! 10885: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}%
! 10886: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}%
! 10887: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}%
! 10888: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}%
! 10889: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}%
! 10890: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}%
! 10891: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}%
! 10892: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}%
! 10893: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}%
! 10894: %
! 10895: % More Greek vowels with accents
! 10896: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}%
! 10897: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}%
! 10898: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}%
! 10899: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}%
! 10900: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}%
! 10901: %
! 10902: % Variant Greek letters
! 10903: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}%
! 10904: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}%
! 10905: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}%
! 10906: %
! 10907: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}%
! 10908: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}%
! 10909: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}%
! 10910: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}%
! 10911: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}%
! 10912: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}%
! 10913: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}%
! 10914: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}%
! 10915: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}%
! 10916: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}%
! 10917: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}%
! 10918: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}%
! 10919: %
! 10920: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}%
! 10921: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}%
! 10922: %
! 10923: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}%
! 10924: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}%
! 10925: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}%
! 10926: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}%
! 10927: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}%
! 10928: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}%
! 10929: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}%
! 10930: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}%
! 10931: %
! 10932: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}%
! 10933: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}%
! 10934: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}%
! 10935: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}%
! 10936: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}%
! 10937: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}%
! 10938: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}%
! 10939: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}%
! 10940: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}%
! 10941: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}%
! 10942: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}%
! 10943: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}%
! 10944: %
! 10945: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}%
! 10946: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}%
! 10947: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}%
! 10948: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}%
! 10949: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}%
! 10950: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}%
! 10951: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}%
! 10952: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}%
! 10953: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}%
! 10954: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}%
! 10955: %
! 10956: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}%
! 10957: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}%
! 10958: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}%
! 10959: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}%
! 10960: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}%
! 10961: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}%
! 10962: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}%
! 10963: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}%
! 10964: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}%
! 10965: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}%
! 10966: %
! 10967: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}%
! 10968: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}%
! 10969: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}%
! 10970: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}%
! 10971: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}%
! 10972: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}%
! 10973: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}%
! 10974: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}%
! 10975: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}%
! 10976: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}%
! 10977: %
! 10978: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}%
! 10979: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}%
! 10980: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}%
! 10981: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}%
! 10982: %
! 10983: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}%
! 10984: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}%
! 10985: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}%
! 10986: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}%
! 10987: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}%
! 10988: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}%
! 10989: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}%
! 10990: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}%
! 10991: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}%
! 10992: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}%
! 10993: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}%
! 10994: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}%
! 10995: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}%
! 10996: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}%
! 10997: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}%
! 10998: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}%
! 10999: %
! 11000: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}%
! 11001: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}%
! 11002: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}%
! 11003: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}%
! 11004: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}%
! 11005: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}%
! 11006: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}%
! 11007: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}%
! 11008: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}%
! 11009: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}%
! 11010: %
! 11011: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}%
! 11012: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}%
! 11013: %
! 11014: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}%
! 11015: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}%
! 11016: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}%
! 11017: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}%
! 11018: %
! 11019: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}%
! 11020: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}%
! 11021: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}%
! 11022: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}%
! 11023: %
! 11024: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}%
! 11025: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}%
! 11026: %
! 11027: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}%
! 11028: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}%
! 11029: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}%
! 11030: %
! 11031: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}%
! 11032: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}%
! 11033: %
! 11034: % Punctuation
! 11035: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}%
! 11036: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}%
! 11037: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}%
! 11038: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}%
! 11039: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}%
! 11040: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}%
! 11041: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}%
! 11042: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}%
! 11043: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}%
! 11044: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}%
! 11045: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}%
! 11046: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}%
! 11047: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}%
! 11048: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}%
! 11049: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}%
! 11050: %
! 11051: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}%
! 11052: %
! 11053: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}%
! 11054: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}%
! 11055: %
! 11056: % Mathematical symbols
! 11057: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}%
! 11058: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}%
! 11059: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}%
! 11060: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}%
! 11061: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}%
! 11062: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}%
! 11063: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}%
! 11064: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}%
! 11065: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}%
! 11066: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}%
! 11067: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}%
! 11068: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}%
! 11069: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}%
! 11070: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}%
! 11071: %
! 11072: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}%
! 11073: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}%
! 11074: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}%
! 11075: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}%
! 11076: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}%
! 11077: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}%
! 11078: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}%
! 11079: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}%
! 11080: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}%
! 11081: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}%
! 11082: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}%
! 11083: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}%
! 11084: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}%
! 11085: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}%
! 11086: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}%
! 11087: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}%
! 11088: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}%
! 11089: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}%
! 11090: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}%
! 11091: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}%
! 11092: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}%
! 11093: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}%
! 11094: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}%
! 11095: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}%
! 11096: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}%
! 11097: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}%
! 11098: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}%
! 11099: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}%
! 11100: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}%
! 11101: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}%
! 11102: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}%
! 11103: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}%
! 11104: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}%
! 11105: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}%
! 11106: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}%
! 11107: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}%
! 11108: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}%
! 11109: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}%
! 11110: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}%
! 11111: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}%
! 11112: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}%
! 11113: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}%
! 11114: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}%
! 11115: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}%
! 11116: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}%
! 11117: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}%
! 11118: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}%
! 11119: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}%
! 11120: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}%
! 11121: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}%
! 11122: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}%
! 11123: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}%
! 11124: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}%
! 11125: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}%
! 11126: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}%
! 11127: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}%
! 11128: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}%
! 11129: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}%
! 11130: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}%
! 11131: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}%
! 11132: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}%
! 11133: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}%
! 11134: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}%
! 11135: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}%
! 11136: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}%
! 11137: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}%
! 11138: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}%
! 11139: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}%
! 11140: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}%
! 11141: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}%
! 11142: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}%
! 11143: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}%
! 11144: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}%
! 11145: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}%
! 11146: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}%
! 11147: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}%
! 11148: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}%
! 11149: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}%
! 11150: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}%
! 11151: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}%
! 11152: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}%
! 11153: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}%
! 11154: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}%
! 11155: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}%
! 11156: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}%
! 11157: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}%
! 11158: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}%
! 11159: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}%
! 11160: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}%
! 11161: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}%
! 11162: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}%
! 11163: %
! 11164: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}%
! 11165: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}%
! 11166: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}%
! 11167: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}%
! 11168: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}%
! 11169: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}%
! 11170: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}%
! 11171: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}%
! 11172: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}%
! 11173: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}%
! 11174: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}%
! 11175: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}%
! 11176: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}%
! 11177: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}%
! 11178: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}%
! 11179: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}%
! 11180: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}%
! 11181: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}%
! 11182: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}%
! 11183: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}%
! 11184: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}%
! 11185: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}%
! 11186: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}%
! 11187: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}%
! 11188: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}%
! 11189: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}%
! 11190: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}%
! 11191: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}%
! 11192: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}%
! 11193: %
! 11194: \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign
! 11195: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}%
! 11196: }% end of \unicodechardefs
! 11197:
! 11198: % UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command)
! 11199: % It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence.
! 11200: \def\utfeightchardefs{%
! 11201: \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii
! 11202: \unicodechardefs
! 11203: }
! 11204:
! 11205: % Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to
! 11206: % non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to
! 11207: % write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for
! 11208: % printing the correct glyphs.
! 11209: \newif\ifpassthroughchars
! 11210: \passthroughcharsfalse
! 11211:
! 11212: % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
! 11213: % provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character
! 11214: %
! 11215: \def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{%
! 11216: \catcode"#1=\active
! 11217: \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{%
! 11218: \begingroup
! 11219: \uccode`\~="##2\relax
! 11220: \uppercase{\gdef~}{%
! 11221: \ifpassthroughchars
! 11222: ##1%
! 11223: \else
! 11224: ##3%
! 11225: \fi
! 11226: }
! 11227: \endgroup
! 11228: }
! 11229: \begingroup
! 11230: \uccode`\.="#1\relax
! 11231: \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}%
! 11232: \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}%
! 11233: \endgroup
! 11234: }
! 11235:
! 11236: % Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition.
! 11237: % It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters.
! 11238: \def\nativeunicodechardefs{%
! 11239: \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative
! 11240: \unicodechardefs
! 11241: }
! 11242:
! 11243: % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
! 11244: % make the character token expand
! 11245: % to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing.
! 11246: \def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{%
! 11247: \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2}
! 11248: \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp
! 11249: }
! 11250:
! 11251: % @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX).
! 11252: \def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{%
! 11253: \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU
! 11254: \unicodechardefs
! 11255: }
! 11256:
! 11257: % US-ASCII character definitions.
! 11258: \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
! 11259: \relax
! 11260: }
! 11261:
! 11262: % Define all Unicode characters we know about. This makes UTF-8 the default
! 11263: % input encoding and allows @U to work.
! 11264: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
! 11265: \nativeunicodechardefsatu
! 11266: \else
! 11267: \utfeightchardefs
! 11268: \fi
! 11269:
! 11270: \message{formatting,}
! 11271:
! 11272: \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
! 11273:
! 11274: \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
! 11275: \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
! 11276: \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
! 11277:
! 11278: % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
! 11279: \vbadness = 10000
! 11280:
! 11281: % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
! 11282: \hbadness = 6666
! 11283:
! 11284: % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
! 11285: \widowpenalty=10000
! 11286: \clubpenalty=10000
! 11287:
! 11288: % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
! 11289: % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
! 11290: % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
! 11291: % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
! 11292: %
! 11293: \def\setemergencystretch{%
! 11294: \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
! 11295: % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
! 11296: \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
! 11297: \else
! 11298: \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
! 11299: \fi
! 11300: }
! 11301:
! 11302: % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
! 11303: % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
! 11304: % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
! 11305: %
! 11306: % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
! 11307: % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
! 11308: %
! 11309: \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
! 11310: \voffset = #3\relax
! 11311: \topskip = #6\relax
! 11312: \splittopskip = \topskip
! 11313: %
! 11314: \vsize = #1\relax
! 11315: \advance\vsize by \topskip
! 11316: \outervsize = \vsize
! 11317: \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
! 11318: \txipageheight = \vsize
! 11319: %
! 11320: \hsize = #2\relax
! 11321: \outerhsize = \hsize
! 11322: \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
! 11323: \txipagewidth = \hsize
! 11324: %
! 11325: \normaloffset = #4\relax
! 11326: \bindingoffset = #5\relax
! 11327: %
! 11328: \ifpdf
! 11329: \pdfpageheight #7\relax
! 11330: \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
! 11331: % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
! 11332: % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
! 11333: \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
! 11334: \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
! 11335: \else
! 11336: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
! 11337: \special{papersize=#8,#7}%
! 11338: \else
! 11339: \pdfpageheight #7\relax
! 11340: \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
! 11341: % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin.
! 11342: \fi
! 11343: \fi
! 11344: %
! 11345: \setleading{\textleading}
! 11346: %
! 11347: \parindent = \defaultparindent
! 11348: \setemergencystretch
! 11349: }
! 11350:
! 11351: % @letterpaper (the default).
! 11352: \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11353: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
! 11354: \textleading = 13.2pt
! 11355: %
! 11356: % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
! 11357: \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
! 11358: {\voffset}{.25in}%
! 11359: {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
! 11360: {11in}{8.5in}%
! 11361: }}
! 11362:
! 11363: % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
! 11364: \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11365: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
! 11366: \textleading = 12pt
! 11367: %
! 11368: \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
! 11369: {-.2in}{0in}%
! 11370: {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
! 11371: {9.25in}{7in}%
! 11372: %
! 11373: \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
! 11374: \tolerance = 700
! 11375: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
! 11376: \defbodyindent = .5cm
! 11377: }}
! 11378:
! 11379: % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
! 11380: % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
! 11381: \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11382: \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
! 11383: \textleading = 12pt
! 11384: %
! 11385: \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
! 11386: {-.2in}{-.4in}%
! 11387: {0pt}{14pt}%
! 11388: {9in}{6in}%
! 11389: %
! 11390: \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
! 11391: \tolerance = 700
! 11392: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
! 11393: \defbodyindent = .4cm
! 11394: }}
! 11395:
! 11396: % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
! 11397: \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11398: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
! 11399: \textleading = 13.2pt
! 11400: %
! 11401: % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
! 11402: % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
! 11403: % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
! 11404: % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
! 11405: % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
! 11406: % your texinfo source file like this:
! 11407: % @tex
! 11408: % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
! 11409: % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
! 11410: % @end tex
! 11411: \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
! 11412: {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
! 11413: {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
! 11414: {297mm}{210mm}%
! 11415: %
! 11416: \tolerance = 700
! 11417: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
! 11418: \defbodyindent = 5mm
! 11419: }}
! 11420:
! 11421: % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
! 11422: % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
! 11423: % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
! 11424: \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11425: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
! 11426: \textleading = 12.5pt
! 11427: %
! 11428: \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
! 11429: {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
! 11430: {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
! 11431: {210mm}{148mm}%
! 11432: %
! 11433: \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
! 11434: \tolerance = 800
! 11435: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
! 11436: \defbodyindent = 2mm
! 11437: \tableindent = 12mm
! 11438: }}
! 11439:
! 11440: % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
! 11441: \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11442: \afourpaper
! 11443: \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
! 11444: {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
! 11445: {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
! 11446: {297mm}{210mm}%
! 11447: %
! 11448: % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
! 11449: \globaldefs = 0
! 11450: }}
! 11451:
! 11452: % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
! 11453: \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
! 11454: \afourpaper
! 11455: \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
! 11456: {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
! 11457: {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
! 11458: {297mm}{210mm}%
! 11459: \globaldefs = 0
! 11460: }}
! 11461:
! 11462: % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
! 11463: % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
! 11464: % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
! 11465: %
! 11466: \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
! 11467: \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
! 11468: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
! 11469: \globaldefs = 1
! 11470: %
! 11471: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
! 11472: \setleading{\textleading}%
! 11473: %
! 11474: \dimen0 = #1\relax
! 11475: \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
! 11476: \advance\dimen0 by 1in % reference point for DVI is 1 inch from top of page
! 11477: %
! 11478: \dimen2 = \hsize
! 11479: \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
! 11480: \advance\dimen2 by 1in % reference point is 1 inch from left edge of page
! 11481: %
! 11482: \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
! 11483: {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
! 11484: {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
! 11485: {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
! 11486: }}
! 11487:
! 11488: % Set default to letter.
! 11489: %
! 11490: \letterpaper
! 11491:
! 11492: % Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes.
! 11493: \hfuzz = 1pt
! 11494:
! 11495:
! 11496: \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
! 11497:
! 11498: \def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
! 11499:
! 11500: % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
! 11501: \catcode`\^^? = 14
! 11502:
! 11503: % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
! 11504: \catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
! 11505: \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
! 11506: \catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
! 11507: \catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
! 11508: \catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
! 11509: \catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
! 11510: \catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
! 11511: \catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
! 11512: \catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
! 11513:
! 11514: % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
! 11515: % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
! 11516: % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
! 11517: %
! 11518: % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
! 11519: % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
! 11520: % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
! 11521: % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
! 11522: %
! 11523: \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
! 11524:
! 11525: % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
! 11526: % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
! 11527: % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
! 11528: % this is not a problem.
! 11529: \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
! 11530:
! 11531: % Set catcodes for Texinfo file
! 11532:
! 11533: % Active characters for printing the wanted glyph.
! 11534: % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
! 11535: % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
! 11536: %
! 11537: \catcode`\"=\active
! 11538: \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
! 11539: \let"=\activedoublequote
! 11540: \catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde
! 11541: \chardef\hatchar=`\^
! 11542: \catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat
! 11543:
! 11544: \catcode`\_=\active
! 11545: \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
! 11546: \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
! 11547: \let\realunder=_
! 11548:
! 11549: \catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}}
! 11550:
! 11551: \chardef \less=`\<
! 11552: \catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless
! 11553: \chardef \gtr=`\>
! 11554: \catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr
! 11555: \catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
! 11556: \catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
! 11557: \catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash
! 11558:
! 11559:
! 11560: % used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page
! 11561: % breaks in the middle of an @tex block.
! 11562: \def\texinfochars{%
! 11563: \let< = \activeless
! 11564: \let> = \activegtr
! 11565: \let~ = \activetilde
! 11566: \let^ = \activehat
! 11567: \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault
! 11568: \let\b = \strong
! 11569: \let\i = \smartitalic
! 11570: % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too.
! 11571: }
! 11572:
! 11573: % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
! 11574: % parsing them.
! 11575: \def\turnoffactive{%
! 11576: \normalturnoffactive
! 11577: \otherbackslash
! 11578: }
! 11579:
! 11580: \catcode`\@=0
! 11581:
! 11582: % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
! 11583: % as in \char`\\.
! 11584: \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
! 11585:
! 11586: % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
! 11587: {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
! 11588:
! 11589: % In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
! 11590: % in fixed width font.
! 11591: \catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on.
! 11592:
! 11593: % Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use
! 11594: % \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char
! 11595: % of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol
! 11596: % font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex
! 11597: % sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
! 11598: % which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
! 11599: % ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the
! 11600: % usual hex value because it has already been made active.
! 11601:
! 11602: @def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
! 11603: @let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
! 11604:
! 11605: % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
! 11606: % catcode other.
! 11607: @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
! 11608:
! 11609: % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
! 11610: % the literal character `\'.
! 11611: %
! 11612: {@catcode`- = @active
! 11613: @gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
! 11614: @passthroughcharstrue
! 11615: @let-=@normaldash
! 11616: @let"=@normaldoublequote
! 11617: @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
! 11618: @let+=@normalplus
! 11619: @let<=@normalless
! 11620: @let>=@normalgreater
! 11621: @let^=@normalcaret
! 11622: @let_=@normalunderscore
! 11623: @let|=@normalverticalbar
! 11624: @let~=@normaltilde
! 11625: @let\=@ttbackslash
! 11626: @markupsetuplqdefault
! 11627: @markupsetuprqdefault
! 11628: @unsepspaces
! 11629: }
! 11630: }
! 11631:
! 11632: % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
! 11633: % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
! 11634: % So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on.
! 11635: @catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other
! 11636:
! 11637: % \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo'
! 11638: %
! 11639: % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
! 11640: % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
! 11641: % a backslash.
! 11642: % If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after
! 11643: % the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error.
! 11644: % This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex.
! 11645: % We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden.
! 11646: {
! 11647: @catcode`@^=7
! 11648: @catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{%
! 11649: @global@let\ = @eatinput%
! 11650: @catcode`@^^M=13%
! 11651: @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}%
! 11652: % Definition for the newline at the end of this file.
! 11653: @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}%
! 11654: % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file.
! 11655: @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}%
! 11656: % In case the first line has a whole-line command on it
! 11657: @let@originalparsearg@parsearg
! 11658: @def@parsearg{@fixbackslash@originalparsearg}
! 11659: }}
! 11660:
! 11661: {@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13%
! 11662: @gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}}
! 11663:
! 11664: % Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token
! 11665: % appears by mistake.
! 11666: {@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13%
! 11667: @gdef@enableemergencynewline{%
! 11668: @gdef^^M{%
! 11669: @par%
! 11670: %<warning: active newline>@par%
! 11671: }}}
! 11672:
! 11673:
! 11674: @gdef@fixbackslash{%
! 11675: @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi
! 11676: @catcode13=5 % regular end of line
! 11677: @enableemergencynewline
! 11678: @let@c=@comment
! 11679: @let@parsearg@originalparsearg
! 11680: % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
! 11681: % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
! 11682: @catcode`+=@active
! 11683: @catcode`@_=@active
! 11684: %
! 11685: % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
! 11686: % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets
! 11687: % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf
! 11688: % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format
! 11689: % file for Texinfo.
! 11690: %
! 11691: @openin 1 texinfo.cnf
! 11692: @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi
! 11693: @closein 1
! 11694: }
! 11695:
! 11696:
! 11697: % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
! 11698: @escapechar = `@@
! 11699:
! 11700: % These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
! 11701: % active definitions as the normal characters.
! 11702: @def@normaldot{.}
! 11703: @def@normalquest{?}
! 11704: @def@normalslash{/}
! 11705:
! 11706: % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
! 11707: % @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
! 11708: @catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
! 11709: @catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
! 11710: @catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
! 11711:
! 11712: @let @hashchar = @normalhash
! 11713:
! 11714: @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
! 11715: @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
! 11716: @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
! 11717: @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
! 11718: @catcode`@'=@active
! 11719: @catcode`@`=@active
! 11720: @markupsetuplqdefault
! 11721: @markupsetuprqdefault
! 11722:
! 11723: @c Local variables:
! 11724: @c eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp)
! 11725: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page"
! 11726: @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
! 11727: @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
! 11728: @c time-stamp-end: "}"
! 11729: @c End:
! 11730:
! 11731: @c vim:sw=2:
! 11732:
! 11733: @enablebackslashhack
FreeBSD-CVSweb <freebsd-cvsweb@FreeBSD.org>
![[BACK]](/icons/cvsweb/back.gif){kind=icon}
Return to texinfo.tex CVS log ![[TXT]](/icons/cvsweb/text.gif){kind=icon}
![[DIR]](/icons/cvsweb/dir.gif){kind=icon}
Up to [local] / OpenXM / src / asir-doc / texinfo